[go: up one dir, main page]
More Web Proxy on the site http://driver.im/

WO2009023623A1 - Heteroaryl amide analogues - Google Patents

Heteroaryl amide analogues Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2009023623A1
WO2009023623A1 PCT/US2008/072760 US2008072760W WO2009023623A1 WO 2009023623 A1 WO2009023623 A1 WO 2009023623A1 US 2008072760 W US2008072760 W US 2008072760W WO 2009023623 A1 WO2009023623 A1 WO 2009023623A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
indole
pyrimidin
alkyl
carboxamide
methyl
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2008/072760
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Rajagopal Bakthavatchalam
David C. Ihle
Scott M. Capitosti
David J. Wustrow
Jun Yuan
Original Assignee
H, Lundbeck A/S
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by H, Lundbeck A/S filed Critical H, Lundbeck A/S
Priority to BRPI0812594-5A priority Critical patent/BRPI0812594A2/en
Priority to AU2008286946A priority patent/AU2008286946B2/en
Priority to EA200971085A priority patent/EA020332B1/en
Priority to US12/672,413 priority patent/US20120190680A1/en
Priority to CN200880021498A priority patent/CN101778850A/en
Priority to JP2010520343A priority patent/JP2010535816A/en
Priority to CA002691512A priority patent/CA2691512A1/en
Priority to EP08797591A priority patent/EP2185560A4/en
Priority to NZ582056A priority patent/NZ582056A/en
Publication of WO2009023623A1 publication Critical patent/WO2009023623A1/en
Priority to IL202550A priority patent/IL202550A0/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D487/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00
    • C07D487/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D477/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D487/04—Ortho-condensed systems
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/16—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for liver or gallbladder disorders, e.g. hepatoprotective agents, cholagogues, litholytics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A61P11/06—Antiasthmatics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/02—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for peripheral neuropathies
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/04—Centrally acting analgesics, e.g. opioids
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
    • A61P27/06—Antiglaucoma agents or miotics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/14—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing three or more hetero rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D471/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00
    • C07D471/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D471/04—Ortho-condensed systems

Definitions

  • This invention relates generally to heteroaryl amide analogues that have useful pharmacological properties.
  • the invention further relates to the use of such compounds for treatig conditions related to P2X 7 receptor activation, for identifying other agents that bind to P2X 7 receptor, and as probes for the detection and localization of P2X 7 receptors.
  • nociceptors A wide variety of physical and chemical stimuli induce activation of such neurons in mammals, leading to recognition of a potentially harmful stimulus. Inappropriate or excessive activation of nociceptors, however, can result in debilitating acute or chronic pain.
  • Neuropathic pain which typically results from damage to the nervous system, involves pain signal transmission in the absence of stimulus, pain from a normally innocuous stimulus (allodynia) and increased pain from a normally painful stimulus
  • neuropathic pain is thought to occur because of sensitization in the peripheral and central nervous systems following initial damage to the peripheral system (e.g., via direct injury or systemic disease). Neuropathic pain is typically burning, shooting and unrelenting in its intensity and can sometimes be more debilitating than the initial injury or disease process that induced it.
  • neuropathic pain is generally suboptimal.
  • Opiates such as morphine
  • opioid analgesics are potent analgesics, but their usefulness is limited because of adverse side effects, such as physical addictiveness and withdrawal properties, as well as respiratory depression, mood changes, and decreased intestinal motility with concomitant constipation, nausea, vomiting, and alterations in the endocrine and autonomic nervous systems.
  • neuropathic pain is frequently non- responsive or only partially responsive to conventional opioid analgesic regimens, or to treatment with other drugs, such as gabapentin.
  • Treatments employing the N- methyl-D-aspartate antagonist ketamine or the alpha(2)-adrenergic agonist clonidine can reduce acute or chronic pain, and permit a reduction in opioid consumption, but these agents are often poorly tolerated due to side effects.
  • Transient inflammation is a beneficial mechanism that protects mammals from invading pathogens. Uncontrolled inflammation, however, causes tissue damage and pain and is the underlying cause of many illnesses, including asthma, as well as other allergic, infectious, autoimmune, degenerative, and idiopathic diseases. Existing treatments often exhibit low, delayed or only temporary efficacy, undesirable side-effects and/or a lack of selectivity.
  • new drugs that overcome one or more of the shortcomings of drugs currently used for immunosuppression or in the treatment or prevention of inflammatory disorders, including allergic disorders, autoimmune disorders, fibrogenic disorders, and neurodegenerative diseases, such as amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Alzheimer's disease, and Huntington's disease.
  • the P2X 7 receptor is a ligand-gated ion channel that is activated by ATP and is present on a variety of cell types, including microglia in the central nervous system and cells involved in inflammation and immune system function, such as immune cells.
  • P2X 7 is involved in activation of lymphocytes and monocyte/macrophages leading to the increased release of pro-inflammatory cytokines (e.g., TNFalpha and IL-I beta) from these cells.
  • pro-inflammatory cytokines e.g., TNFalpha and IL-I beta
  • P2X 7 receptor antagonists may find use in the treatment and prophylaxis of pain, including acute, chronic and neuropathic pain, as well as a variety of other conditions including osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, arthro sclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, Alzheimer's disease, traumatic brain injury, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, and fibrosis of internal organs (e.g., interstitial fibrosis). Small molecule P2X 7 receptor antagonists are desirable for such therapies.
  • the present invention fulfills this need, and provides further related advantages.
  • the present invention provides heteroaryl amide analogues of Formula Ia or
  • U is CR 1A or N
  • X is absent or Ci-C 6 alkylene that is optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents selected from RB, R C , RD, and RE;
  • R B , R C , R D , and R E are each independently hydroxy, -COOH, Ci-C 8 alkyl, (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)Co-C 4 alkyl, Ci-C 6 aminoalkyl, C 2 -C 8 alkyl ether, mono- or di-CQ-
  • Y is CrQalkyl, C 3 -C 16 cycloalkyl, 4- to 16-membered heterocycloalkyl, 6- to
  • R 1 A is hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, COOH, Ci-C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, Ci-C 6 haloalkyl, C]-C 6 hydroxyalkyl, Ci-C ⁇ aminoalkyl, Ci-C 6 alkoxy, Ci-C 6 haloalkoxy, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, Ci-C 6 alkanoyl, Ci-C 6 alkylsulfonyl, (C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino, CrC 6 alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminosulfony
  • R A is a group of the formula -L-A-M, wherein: L is absent or CrC ⁇ alkylene that is optionally modified by (i) the replacement of a carbon-carbon single bond with a double or triple carbon-carbon bond, or (ii) substitution with oxo, -COOH, -SO 3 H, -SO 2 NH 2 , -PO 3 H 2 , tetrazole or oxadiazolone;
  • A is absent or CO, O, NR 6 , S, SO, SO 2 , CONR 6 , NR 6 CO, (C 4 - C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 2 alkyl, 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl; wherein R 6 is hydrogen or Ci-C 6 alkyl; and
  • Ci-C 6 haloalkyl Ci-C 6 alkoxy, (4- to 10-membered carbocycle)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, (4- to 10-membered heterocycle)Co-C 4 alkyl, Q-Cealkanoyloxy, Q-Cealkanoylamino,
  • heteroaryl amide analogues of Formula Ia and/or Ib are P2X 7 receptor antagonists with an IC 50 value no greater than 20 micromolar, 10 micromolar, 5 micromolar, 1 micromolar, 500 nanomolar or 100 nanomolar in an in vitro assay for determination of P2X 7 receptor antagonist activity.
  • P2X 7 receptor antagonists exhibit no detectable agonist activity in an in vitro assay of P2X 7 receptor activity (e.g., in an assay provided in Example 7, herein) at a concentration equal to the IC 50 , 10 times the IC 50 or 100 times the IC5 0 and/or at a concentration of 2,500 nM.
  • heteroaryl amide analogues provided herein are labeled with a detectable marker (e.g., radiolabeled or fluorescein conjugated).
  • a detectable marker e.g., radiolabeled or fluorescein conjugated
  • the present invention further provides, within other aspects, pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one heteroaryl amide analogue provided herein in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • methods for modulating (e.g., reducing) cellular P2X 7 receptor activation or activity, comprising contacting a cell (e.g., microglia, astrocyte or peripheral macrophage or monocyte) that expresses a P2X 7 receptor with at least one P2X 7 receptor modulator as described herein.
  • a cell e.g., microglia, astrocyte or peripheral macrophage or monocyte
  • P2X 7 receptor modulator as described herein.
  • Such contact may occur in vivo or in vitro and is generally performed using a concentration of P2X 7 receptor modulator that is sufficient to detectably alter P2X 7 receptor activity in vitro (as determined, for example, using an assay as described in Example 7).
  • the present invention further provides methods for treating a condition responsive to P2X 7 receptor modulation in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X 7 receptor antagonist as described herein.
  • methods for treating pain in a patient comprising administering to a patient suffering from (or at risk for) pain a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X 7 receptor antagonist as described herein.
  • methods for treating inflammation in a patient comprising administering to a patient suffering from (or at risk for) inflammation a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X 7 receptor antagonist as described herein.
  • Methods are further provided for treating osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, arthrosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, Alzheimer's disease, traumatic brain injury, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, ocular conditions (e.g., glaucoma), cirrhosis, lupus, scleroderma, or fibrosis of internal organs (e.g., interstitial fibrosis) in a patient, comprising administering to a patient suffering from
  • the present invention provides methods for inhibiting death of retinal ganglion cells in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X 7 receptor antagonist as described herein.
  • Methods are further provided for identifying an agent that binds to P2X 7 receptor, comprising: (a) contacting P2X 7 receptor with a labeled compound that is a heteroaryl amide analogue as described herein under conditions that permit binding of the compound to P2X 7 receptor, thereby generating bound, labeled compound; (b) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound, labeled compound in the absence of test agent; (c) contacting the bound, labeled compound with a test agent; (d) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound labeled compound in the presence of test agent; and (e) detecting a decrease in signal detected in step (d), as compared to the signal detected in step (b).
  • the present invention provides methods for determining the presence or absence of P2X 7 receptor in a sample, comprising: (a) contacting a sample with a compound as described herein under conditions that permit modulation by the compound of P2X 7 receptor activity; and (b) detecting a signal indicative of a level of the compound modulating P2X 7 receptor activity.
  • the present invention also provides packaged pharmaceutical preparations, comprising: (a) a pharmaceutical composition as described herein in a container; and (b) instructions for using the composition to (i) treat one or more conditions responsive to P2X 7 receptor modulation, such as pain, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, arthrosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, Alzheimer's disease, traumatic brain injury, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, ocular conditions (e.g., glaucoma), cirrhosis, lupus, scleroderma, and/or fibrosis of internal organs (e.g., interstitial fibrosis) or (ii) provide retinal neuroprotection (e.g., inhibit death of retinal ganglion cells).
  • P2X 7 receptor modulation such as pain, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, arthrosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, Alzheimer's disease, traumatic brain injury, asthma, chronic obstructive
  • the present invention provides methods for preparing the compounds disclosed herein, including the intermediates.
  • heteroaryl amide analogue encompasses all compounds of Formula Ia or Formula Ib, as well as compounds of other Formulas provided herein (including any enantiomers, racemates and stereoisomers, and including the various crystal forms and polymorphs) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates (e.g., hydrates, including hydrates of salts), amides and esters of such compounds.
  • a “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” of a compound recited herein is an acid or base salt that is suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings or animals without excessive toxicity or carcinogenicity, and preferably without irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication.
  • Such salts include mineral and organic acid salts of basic residues such as amines, as well as alkali or organic salts of acidic residues such as carboxylic acids.
  • Specific pharmaceutically acceptable anions for use in salt formation include, but are not limited to, acetate, 2- acetoxybenzoate, ascorbate, benzoate, bicarbonate, bromide, calcium edetate, carbonate, chloride, citrate, dihydrochloride, diphosphate, ditartrate, edetate, estolate (ethylsuccinate), formate, fumarate, gluceptate, gluconate, glutamate, glycolate, glycollylarsanilate, hexylresorcinate, hydrabamine, hydrobromide, hydrochloride, hydroiodide, hydroxymaleate, hydroxynaphthoate, iodide, isethionate, lactate, lactobionate, malate, maleate, mandelate, methylbromide, methylnitrate, methylsulfate, mucate, napsylate, nitrate, pamoate, pantothenate, phenyla
  • pharmaceutically acceptable cations for use in salt formation include, but are not limited to ammonium, benzathine, chloroprocaine, choline, diethanolamine, ethylenediamine, meglumine, procaine, and metals such as aluminum, calcium, lithium, magnesium, potassium, sodium and zinc.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable acid or base salt can be synthesized from a parent compound that contains a basic or acidic moiety by any conventional chemical method.
  • such salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or base forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate base or acid in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two; generally, the use of nonaqueous media, such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, methanol, isopropanol or acetonitrile, is preferred.
  • nonaqueous media such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, methanol, isopropanol or acetonitrile
  • prodrugs of the compounds of the recited Formulas are provided herein.
  • a "prodrug” is a compound that may not fully satisfy the structural requirements of the compounds provided herein, but is modified in vivo, following administration to a patient, to produce a compound of a formula provided herein.
  • a prodrug may be an acylated derivative of such a compound.
  • Prodrugs include compounds wherein hydroxy, amine or sulfhydryl groups are bonded to any group that, when administered to a mammalian subject, cleaves to form a free hydroxy, amino or sulfhydryl group, respectively.
  • Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to, acetate, formate, benzoate and peptide derivatives of alcohol and amine functional groups within a compound provided herein.
  • Prodrugs may generally be prepared by modifying functional groups present in the compounds in such a way that the modifications are cleaved in vivo to yield the parent compounds.
  • alkyl refers to a straight or branched chain saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon.
  • Alkyl groups include groups having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms (Cl-C8alkyl), from 1 to 6 carbon atoms (Cl-C6alkyl) and from 1 to 4 carbon atoms (Cl-C4alkyl), such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, 2-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, 2-hexyl, 3-hexyl and 3-methylpentyl.
  • CO-Cnalkyl refers to a single covalent bond (CO) or an alkyl group having from 1 to n carbon atoms; for example "C0-C4alkyl” refers to a single covalent bond or a Cl- C4alkyl group. In some instances, a substituent of an alkyl group is specifically indicated.
  • Cl-C6hydroxyalkyl is a Cl-C6alkyl group substituted with at least one -OH
  • Cl-C ⁇ aminoalkyl is a Cl-C6alkyl group substituted with at least one — NH2
  • Cl-C6cyanoalkyl is a Cl-C6alkyl group substituted with at least one -CN.
  • Alkenyl refers to straight or branched chain alkene groups, which comprise at least one unsaturated carbon-carbon double bond. Alkenyl groups include C2-
  • C8alkenyl, C2-C6alkenyl and C2-C4alkenyl groups which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or
  • C ⁇ cyanoalkenyl is a C2-C6alkenyl group substituted with at least one -CN.
  • Alkynyl refers to straight or branched chain alkyne groups, which have one or more unsaturated carbon-carbon bonds, at least one of which is a triple bond. Alkynyl groups include C2-C8alkynyl, C2-C6alkynyl and C2-C4alkynyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • Alkylene refers to a divalent alkyl group, as defined above.
  • Cl-C2alkylene is methylene or ethylene; C0-C4alkylene is a single covalent bond or an alkylene group having 1, 2, 3 or carbon atoms; C0-C2alkylene is a single covalent bond, methylene or ethylene.
  • a "Cl-C6alkylene that is optionally modified by the replacement of a carbon-carbon single bond with a double or triple carbon-carbon bond" is a Cl-C6alkylene group as described above, or a divalent C2-C6alkene or C2- C ⁇ alkyne.
  • a “cycloalkyl” is a group that comprises one or more saturated and/or partially saturated rings in which all ring members are carbon, such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, adamantyl, myrtanyl and partially saturated variants of the foregoing, such as cyclohexenyl. Cycloalkyl groups do not comprise an aromatic ring or a heterocyclic ring. Certain cycloalkyl groups are C3- C7cycloalkyl, in which the cycloalkyl group contains a single ring having from 3 to 7 ring members, all of which are carbon.
  • a "(C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl” is a C3- C7cycloalkyl group linked via a single covalent bond or a Cl-C4alkylene group.
  • a "(C4-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkylene” is a divalent (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-
  • C4alkyl group that is linked via two single covalent bonds to two specified moieties.
  • one single covalent bond is located on the cyclic portion and the other is located on the alkylene portion, if present; alternatively, if no alkylene group is present, both single covalent bonds are on different ring members.
  • group RA if A is (C6cycloalkyl)C2alkylene and M is COOH, one RA moiety so formed is:
  • alkoxy is meant an alkyl group as described above attached via an oxygen bridge.
  • Alkoxy groups include C ! -C 6 alkoxy and Q-Qalkoxy groups, which have from 1 to 6 or from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • Methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, sec-butoxy, tert-butoxy, n-pentoxy, 2- pentoxy, 3-pentoxy, isopentoxy, neopentoxy, hexoxy, 2-hexoxy, 3-hexoxy, and 3- methylpentoxy are representative alkoxy groups.
  • Alkanoyl groups include, for example, C 2 -Cgalkanoyl, C 2 -C 6 alkanoyl and C 2 -C 4 alkanoyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, from 2 to 6 or from 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • Alkyl ether refers to a linear or branched ether substituent (i.e., an alkyl group that is substituted with an alkoxy group).
  • Alkyl ether groups include C 2 - C 8 alkyl ether, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether and C 2 -C 4 alkyl ether groups, which have 2 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • a C 2 alkyl ether substituent is -CH 2 -O-CH 3 .
  • Alkoxycarbonyl groups include C 1 -C 8 , C 1 -C 6 and C 1 -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl groups, which have from 1 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively, in the alkyl portion of the group (i.e., the carbon of the keto bridge is not included in the indicated number of carbon atoms).
  • Alkanoyloxy groups include C 1 -C 8 , C 1 -C 6 and C 1 -C4alkanoyloxy groups, which have from 1 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively, in the alkyl portion of the group.
  • Alkanoylamino groups include C 1 -Cg, Cj-C 6 and C 1 -C 4 alkanoylamino groups, which have from 1 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms within the alkanoyl group, respectively, in the alkyl portion of the group.
  • Alkylsulfonyl refers to groups of the formula -(SO 2 )-alkyl, in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment. Alkylsulfonyl groups include C 1 - C 6 alkylsulfonyl and Ci-C 4 alkylsulfonyl groups, which have from 1 to 6 or from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. Methylsulfonyl is one representative alkylsulfonyl group.
  • C 1 -C 4 haloalkylsulfonyl is an alkylsulfonyl group that has from 1 to 4 carbon atoms and is substituted with at least one halogen (e.g., trifluoromethylsulfonyl).
  • Alkylsulfonylamino refers to groups of the formula -N(R)-(SO 2 )-alkyl, in which R is hydrogen or Cj-C ⁇ alkyl and the nitrogen atom is the point of attachment.
  • Alkylsulfonylamino groups include CrC ⁇ alkylsulfonylamino and C 1 - C 4 alkylsulfonylamino groups, which have from 1 to 6 or 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively.
  • Methylsulfonylamino is a representative alkylsulfonylamino group.
  • C 1 - C 6 haloalkylsulfonylamino is an alkylsulfonylamino group that has from 1 to 6 carbon atoms and is substituted with at least one halogen (e.g., trifluoromethylsulfonylamino) .
  • halogen e.g., trifluoromethylsulfonylamino
  • Aminosulfonyl refers to groups of the formula -(SO 2 )-NH 2 , in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment.
  • di- or di-(Ci- C 6 alkyl)aminosulfonyl refers to groups that satisfy the formula -(SO 2 )-NR 2 , in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment, and in which one R is Ci-C ⁇ alkyl and the other R is hydrogen or an independently chosen Q-C ⁇ alkyl.
  • Alkylaminoalkyl refers to an alkylamino group linked via an alkylene group
  • Alkylaminoalkyl groups include, for example, mono- and di-(C 1 -C 8 alkyl)aminoC 1 -Cgalkyl, mono- and di-(C]-C 6 alkyl)aminoCi-C 6 alkyl and mono- and di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminoC 1 -C 4 alkyl.
  • “Mono- or di-(CrC6alkyl)aminoCo- C 6 alkyl” refers to a mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino group linked via a single covalent bond or a Ci-C 6 alkylene group.
  • alkylamino and “alkylaminoalkyl” differs from the definition of "alkyl” used for all other alkyl-containing groups, in the inclusion of cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups (e.g., (C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 6 alkyl).
  • amino sulfonyl refers to a sulfonamide group (i.e., -(SO 2 )NH 2 ).
  • “Mono- or di-(C 1 -C 8 alkyl)aminosulfonyl” refers to groups of the formula -(SO 2 )- N(R) 2 , in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment, one R is Q-Csalkyl and the other R is hydrogen or an independently chosen Ci-Cgalkyl.
  • “Mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)aminosulfonylCo-C 4 alkyl” is an aminosulfonyl group in which one or both of the hydrogen atoms is replaced with C 1 -QaIkVl, and which is linked via a single covalent bond (i.e., mono- or di-(C 1 - C 6 alkyl)aminosulfonyl) or a Cj-C 4 alkylene group (i.e., -(C 1 -C 4 alkyl)-(SO 2 )N(C 1 - C 6 alkyl) 2 ). If both hydrogen atoms are so replaced, the C ! -C 6 alkyl groups may be the same or different.
  • halogen refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
  • haloalkyl is an alkyl group that is substituted with 1 or more independently chosen halogens (e.g., "Ci-C ⁇ haloalkyl” groups have from 1 to 6 carbon atoms).
  • haloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, mono-, di- or tri-fluoromethyl; mono-, di- or tri-chloromethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta- fluoroethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta-chloroethyl; and 1,2,2,2-tetrafluoro-l- trifluoromethyl-ethyl.
  • Typical haloalkyl groups are trifluoromethyl and difluoromethyl.
  • haloalkoxy refers to a haloalkyl group as defined above that is linked via an oxygen bridge.
  • a dash (“-") that is not between two letters or symbols is used to indicate a point of attachment for a substituent. For example, -CONH 2 is attached through the carbon atom.
  • a “carbocycle” or “carbocyclic group” comprises at least one ring formed entirely by carbon-carbon bonds (referred to herein as a carbocyclic ring), and does not contain a heterocycle. Unless otherwise specified, each ring within a carbocycle may be independently saturated, partially saturated or aromatic, and is optionally substituted as indicated.
  • a carbocycle generally has from 1 to 3 fused, pendant or spiro rings and optionally further contains one or more alkylene bridges; carbocycles within certain embodiments have one ring or two fused rings. Typically, each ring contains from 3 to 8 ring members (i.e., C 3 -C 8 ); C 5 -C 7 rings are recited in certain embodiments.
  • Carbocycles comprising fused, pendant or spiro rings typically contain from 9 to 16 ring members.
  • Certain representative carbocycles are cycloalkyl as described above (e.g., cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl or adamantly).
  • Other carbocycles are aryl (i.e., contain at least one aromatic carbocyclic ring, with or without one or more additional aromatic and/or cycloalkyl rings).
  • Such aryl carbocycles include, for example, phenyl, naphthyl (e.g., 1-naphthyl and 2-naphthyl), fluorenyl, indanyl and 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthyl.
  • haloaryl refers to an aryl group that is substituted with at least one halogen.
  • Ce-CioarylCo-Csalkyl groups i.e., groups in which a 6- to 10-membered carbocyclic group comprising at least one aromatic ring is linked via a single covalent bond or a CrCgalkylene group.
  • Phenyl groups linked via a single covalent bond or Q-Caalkylene group are designated phenylCo-C 2 alkyl (e.g., benzyl, 1-phenyl-ethyl and 2-phenyl-ethyl).
  • a “heterocycle” or “heterocyclic group” has from 1 to 3 fused, pendant or spiro rings, at least one of which is a heterocyclic ring (i.e., one or more ring atoms is a heteroatom independently chosen from O, S and N, with the remaining ring atoms being carbon). Additional rings, if present, may be heterocyclic or carbocyclic. Typically, a heterocyclic ring comprises 1, 2, 3 or 4 heteroatoms; within certain embodiments each heterocyclic ring has 1 or 2 heteroatoms per ring.
  • Each heterocyclic ring generally contains from 3 to 8 ring members (rings having from 4 or 5 to 7 ring members are recited in certain embodiments) and heterocycles comprising fused, pendant or spiro rings typically contain from 9 to 14 ring members.
  • Certain heterocycles comprise a sulfur atom as a ring member; in certain embodiments, the sulfur atom is oxidized to SO or SO 2 .
  • a heterocycle may be a heterocycloalkyl group (i.e., each ring is saturated or partially saturated), such as a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, which generally comprises 1, 2, 3 or 4 ring atoms that are independently chosen from C, O, N and S; or a heteroaryl group (i.e., at least one ring within the group is aromatic), such as a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl (which may be monocyclic or bicyclic) or a 6-membered heteroaryl (e.g., pyridyl or pyrimidyl).
  • N-linked heterocyclic groups are linked via a component nitrogen atom.
  • aralkyl refers to a moiety composed of an alkyl radical bearing an aryl substituent, wherein the aralkyl moiety has from about 7 to about 50 carbon atoms (and all combinations and subcombinations of ranges and specific numbers of carbon atoms therein), and where aryl and alkyl are as previously defined with from about 7 to about 11 carbon atoms being preferred.
  • Non-limiting examples include, for example, benzyl, diphenylmethyl, triphenylmethyl, alpha- or beta- phenylethyl, and diphenylethyl.
  • heteroarylkyl refers to a ring system composed of a heteroaryl substituted alkyl radical where heteroaryl and alkyl are as previously defined, and where the heteroaralkyl group has from about 7 to about 50 carbon atoms (and all combinations and subcombinations of ranges and specific numbers of carbon atoms therein),.
  • Non-limiting examples include, for example, 2-(lH-pyrrol-3- yl)ethyl, 3-pyridylmethyl, 5-(2H-tetrazolyl)methyl, and 3-(pyrimidin-2-yl)-2- methylcyclopentanyl.
  • a “heterocycleCo-C 4 alkyl” is a heterocyclic group linked via a single covalent bond or Q-Qalkylene group.
  • a “(4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C 1 -C 4 alkyl” is a heterocycloalkyl ring with from 4 to 7 ring members that is linked via a C 1 - C 4 alkylene group.
  • a “(4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C 4 alkylene” is a divalent (4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C 4 alkyl group that is linked via two single covalent bonds to two specified moieties.
  • one such single covalent bond is located on the cyclic portion and the other is located on the alkylene portion, if present; alternatively, if no alkylene group is present, both such single covalent bonds are located on different ring members.
  • group R A if A is a (piperidinyl)C 2 alkylene and M is COOH, one R A moiety so formed is:
  • a “substituent,” as used herein, refers to a molecular moiety that is covalently bonded to an atom within a molecule of interest.
  • a ring substituent may be a moiety such as a halogen, alkyl group, haloalkyl group or other group that is covalently bonded to an atom (preferably a carbon or nitrogen atom) that is a ring member.
  • Substituents of aromatic groups are generally covalently bonded to a ring carbon atom.
  • substitution refers to replacing a hydrogen atom in a molecular structure with a substituent, such that the valence on the designated atom is not exceeded, and such that a chemically stable compound (i.e., a compound that can be isolated, characterized, and tested for biological activity) results from the substitution.
  • Groups that are "optionally substituted” are unsubstituted or are substituted by other than hydrogen at one or more available positions, typically 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 positions, by one or more suitable groups (which may be the same or different).
  • Optional substitution is also indicated by the phrase "substituted with from 0 to X substituents," where X is the maximum number of possible substituents.
  • Certain optionally substituted groups are substituted with from 0 to 2, 3 or 4 independently selected substituents (i.e., are unsubstituted or substituted with up to the recited maximum number of substituents).
  • Other optionally substituted groups are substituted with at least one substituent (e.g., substituted with from 1 to 2, 3 or 4 independently selected substituents).
  • P2X 7 receptor refers to any P2X7 receptor, preferably a mammalian receptor such as the human or rat P2X7 receptor disclosed in US Patent No. 6,133,434, as well as homologues thereof found in other species.
  • P2X 7 receptor modulator also referred to herein as a “modulator,” is a compound that increases or decreases P2X 7 receptor activation and/or P2X 7 receptor- mediated activity (e.g., signal transduction).
  • P2X 7 receptor modulators specifically provided herein are compounds of Formula I and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates and esters thereof.
  • a modulator may be a P2X 7 receptor agonist or antagonist.
  • a modulator is considered an "antagonist” if it detectably inhibits P2X 7 receptor-mediated signal transduction (using, for example, a representative assay provided in Example 7); in general, such an antagonist inhibits P2X 7 receptor activation with a IC 50 value of less than 20 micromolar, preferably less than 10 micromolar, more preferably less than 5 micromolar, more preferably less than 1 micromolar, still more preferably less than 500 nanomolar, and most preferably less than 100 nanomolar within an assay provided in Example 7.
  • P2X 7 receptor antagonists include neutral antagonists and inverse agonists.
  • An "inverse agonist" of P2X 7 receptor is a compound that reduces the activity of P2X 7 receptor below its basal activity level in the absence of added ligand.
  • Inverse agonists of P2X 7 receptor may also inhibit the activity of ligand at P2X 7 receptor and/or binding of ligand to P2X 7 receptor.
  • the basal activity of P2X 7 receptor, as well as a reduction in P2X 7 receptor activity due to the presence of P2X 7 receptor antagonist, may be determined from a calcium mobilization assay (e.g., the assay of Example 7).
  • a "neutral antagonist" of P2X 7 receptor is a compound that inhibits the activity of ligand at P2X 7 receptor, but does not significantly change the basal activity of the receptor (i.e., within a calcium mobilization assay as described in Example 7 performed in the absence of ligand, P2X 7 receptor activity is reduced by no more than
  • Neutral antagonists of P2X 7 receptor may inhibit the binding of ligand to P2X 7 receptor.
  • P2X 7 receptor agonist is a compound that elevates the activity of the P2X 7 receptor above the basal activity level of the receptor (i.e., enhances P2X 7 receptor activation and/or P2X 7 receptor-mediated activity, such as signal transduction).
  • P2X 7 receptor agonist activity may be detected using the representative assay provided in Example 7.
  • P2X 7 receptor agonists include ATP and 2'(3')-O-(4-benzoyl-benzoyl)adenosine 5'-triphosephate (BzATP).
  • a “therapeutically effective amount” is an amount that, upon administration to a patient, results in a discernible patient benefit (e.g., provides detectable relief from at least one condition being treated). Such relief may be detected using any appropriate criteria, including alleviation of one or more symptoms such as pain.
  • a therapeutically effective amount or dose generally results in a concentration of compound in a body fluid (such as blood, plasma, serum, CSF, synovial fluid, lymph, cellular interstitial fluid, tears or urine) that is sufficient to alter
  • P2X 7 receptor-mediated signal transduction using an assay provided in Example 7).
  • the discernible patient benefit may be apparent after administration of a single dose, or may become apparent following repeated administration of the therapeutically effective dose according to a predetermined regimen, depending upon the indication for which the compound is administered.
  • statically significant results varying from control at the p ⁇ 0.1 level of significance as measured using a standard parametric assay of statistical significance such as a student's T test.
  • a "patient” is any individual treated with a compound provided herein. Patients include humans, as well as other animals such as companion animals (e.g., dogs and cats) and livestock. Patients may be experiencing one or more symptoms of a condition responsive to P2X 7 receptor modulation or may be free of such symptom(s) (i.e., treatment may be prophylactic in a patient considered at risk for the development of such symptoms).
  • HETEROARYL AMIDE ANALOGUES As noted above, the present invention provides heteroaryl amide analogues. In certain embodiments, the present invention provides heteroaryl amide analogues of Formula Ia and/or Ib:
  • U is CRiA or N
  • X is absent or Ci-C 6 alkylene that is optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents selected from R B , R C? R D , and R E ;
  • R B , R C , R D , and R E are each independently hydroxy, -COOH, CrCgalkyl, (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, CrC 6 aminoalkyl, C 2 -Csalkyl ether, mono- or di-(Ci-
  • Y is Ci-C 8 alkyl, C 3 -Ci 6 cycloalkyl, 4- to 16-membered heterocycloalkyl, 6- to 16-membered aryl or 5- to 16-membered heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 to 6 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, COOH, Ci-C 6 alkyl, C 2 - C ⁇ alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, CrC ⁇ haloalkyl, Ci-C 6 hydroxyalkyl, Ci-C 6 aminoalkyl, C 1 - C 6 alkoxy, Ci-C 6 haloalkoxy, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, CrC 6 alkanoyl, CrCisalkylsulfonyl, (C 3 -C 7 cycloalkyl)Co-C 4 alkyl,
  • Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , and Z 4 are independently CR 1 or N;
  • R 1A is hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, COOH, C r C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C r C 6 haloalkyl, CrC ⁇ hydroxyalkyl, Ci-Qaminoalkyl, Ci-C 6 alkoxy, Ci-C 6 haloalkoxy, C 2 -C 6 alkyl ether, Q-C ⁇ alkanoyl, C !
  • each R 1 is independently hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, COOH, CrC 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C !
  • R A is a group of the formula -L-A-M, wherein:
  • L is absent or CrQalkylene that is optionally modified by (i) the replacement of a carbon-carbon single bond with a double or triple carbon-carbon bond, or (ii) substitution with oxo, -COOH, -SO 3 H, -SO 2 NH 2 , -PO 3 H 2 , tetrazole or oxadiazolone;
  • A is absent or CO, O, NR 6 , S, SO, SO 2 , CONR 6 , NR 6 CO, (C 4 - C 7 cycloalkyl)Co-C 2 alkyl, 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl; wherein R 6 is hydrogen or Ci-C ⁇ alkyl; and
  • M is: (i) hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, carboxyalkyl, or -COOH; or
  • such compounds may be used in vitro or in vivo, as modulators of P2X 7 receptors that may be used in a variety of contexts, including in the treatment of conditions responsive to P2X 7 receptor modulation, such as pain.
  • Such modulators are also useful as probes for detection and localization of P2X 7 receptor and as standards in P2X 7 receptor-mediated signal transduction assays.
  • such compounds exhibit no detectable agonist activity an in vitro assay of P2X 7 receptor agonism. In certain other embodiments, such compounds are capable of exhibiting an
  • IC 50 value 20 micromolar or less in an assay for P2X 7 receptor antagonism.
  • the compounds of the present invention or salts or hydrates thereof are compounds of formula Ia.
  • the compounds of the present invention or salts or hydrates thereof are compounds of formula Ib.
  • the compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib are provided as a salt or hydrate thereof.
  • U is CR 1A ; in further embodiments, U is CH.
  • Z 1 , Z 2 and Z 3 are each CR 1 .
  • R B , R C , R D , and R E are each independently -COOH, CrCgalkyl, (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)C 0 -C 4 alkyl, C 1 - C ⁇ aminoalkyl, C 2 -C 8 alkyl ether, mono- or di-(Ci-C 6 alkyl)aminoC 0 -C 4 alkyl, (4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C 4 alkyl and phenylC 0 -C2alkyl; or any two of R B , R C , R D , and R E taken together with the carbon atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; or any one of R B , R C , R D5 and R E taken together with R 4 and the
  • R B , R C , R D , and R E are each independently C 1 -C 4 alkyl, (C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl)Co-C 2 alkyl, or phenylCo-C 2 alkyl; In further aspects of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, any two of R B , R C ,
  • R D , and R E taken together with the carbon atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
  • any one of R B , R C , R D , and R E taken together with R 4 and the atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
  • U is CR 1 A (e.g., CH).
  • U is N.
  • Y is C 1 -
  • Y is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents. In further embodiments, Y is optionally substituted with 1 or 2 substituents.
  • Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , and Z 4 are independently CH. In other aspects, Z 4 is N. In further aspects, at least one Of Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , and Z 4 is CR 1 . In certain further aspects, Z 1 or Z 4 is CRj; or Z 1 is CR 1 .
  • R 1 is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, aminocarbonyl, or Ci-C ⁇ haloalkyl. In certain aspects where R 1 is halogen, said halogen is fluoro, chloro, or bromo; said halogen is fluoro. In certain further aspects
  • R 1 is Ci-C 3 haloalkyl; in still other aspects R 1 is Cjhaloalkyl; in yet other aspects, said Cjhaloalkyl is trifluoromethyl. Alternatively, each R 1 is H.
  • R 1 A is hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, COOH, Q-Qalkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, C 2 -C 6 alkynyl, C r C 6 haloalkyl, Ci-Qhydroxyalkyl, Ci-C 6 aminoalkyl, Ci-C 6 alkoxy, CrC ⁇ haloalkoxy, C 2 -C ⁇ alkyl ether, Q-Qalkanoyl, C !
  • R 4 is H.
  • M is:
  • M is: (i) hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or
  • M is arylCj- C 4 alkyl or heteroarylC 1 -C 4 alkyl. In some such compounds, M is substituted; in others, it is unsubstituted.
  • M is:
  • Ci-C ⁇ alkanoylamino mono- or di-(C 1 -C 6 alkyl)amino
  • Ci-C ⁇ alkylsulfonyl Ci-C ⁇ alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(Ci-C 6 alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(Ci- C 6 alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle.
  • M is optionally substituted with one or two substituents.
  • substituents are independently chosen from halogen, C t -C ⁇ alkyl, C ! -C 6 haloalkyl, and Ci-C ⁇ alkoxy.
  • R A is other than halophenyl, other than haloaryl, other than cycloalkyl, and/or other than thienyl.
  • R A when R A is optionally substuted heteroaryl, said heteroaryl has at least one oxygen or nitrogen ring atom, preferably at least one nitrogen ring atom, and more preferably at least two nitrogen ring atoms.
  • R A is other than carbocyclic.
  • R v is arylQ- C 4 alkyl or heteroarylC 1 -C 4 alkyl.
  • R y is substituted; in others, it is unsubstituted.
  • R v is other than aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, or dialkylaminoalkyl, alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl.
  • W is-
  • M is optionally substituted heteroaryl; preferably said heteroaryl contains at least one nitrogen ring atom, more preferably said heteroaryl contains at least two nitrogen ring atoms.
  • M is optionally substituted pyrimidinyl, preferably optionally substituted pyrimidin-2-yl.
  • X is Ci-C 2 alkylene, optionally substituted, preferably substituted with Ci-C 4 alkyl.
  • X is substituted with at least 2 substituents selected from R B , R C , R D , and R E , wherein any two of R B , Rc, R D , and R E taken together with the carbon atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl.
  • X is substituted with at least 2 substituents selected from R B , R C , R D , and R E , wherein any two of R B , R C , R D , and RE taken together with the carbon atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, preferably a 5- to 6-membered cycloalkyl.
  • Y is optionally substituted carbocycle or heterocycle, preferably adamantyl, phenyl, pyridyl, or morpholinyl, each optionally substituted.
  • the compound is a compound provided in Table A, herein, or a salt or hydrate thereof.
  • Representative heteroaryl amide analogues provided herein include, but are not limited to, those specifically described in Examples 1-6 and accompanying Table A. It will be apparent that the specific compounds recited herein are representative only, and are not intended to limit the scope of the present invention. Further, as noted above, all compounds of the present invention may be present as a free acid or base, or as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt. In addition, other forms such as hydrates and prodrugs of such compounds are specifically contemplated by the present invention.
  • heteroaryl amide analogues provided herein detectably alter (modulate) P2X 7 receptor activity, as determined using an assay such as an assay recited in Example 7, herein. Additional assays that may be used for this purpose include assays that measure IL- l ⁇ release; assays that measure uptake of a membrane-impermeant fluorescent dye such as YO-PROl; assays that measure lucifer yellow uptake; assays that measure ethidium bromide uptake; and assays that use calcium imaging to detect P2X 7 activity; all of which assays are well known in the art. Certain modulators provided herein detectably modulate P2X 7 receptor activity at micromolar concentrations, at nanomolar concentrations, or at subnanomolar concentrations.
  • IC 5O values for such compounds may be determined using a standard in vitro P2X 7 receptor-mediated calcium mobilization assay, as provided in Example 7. Briefly, cells expressing P2X 7 receptor are contacted with a compound of interest and with an indicator of intracellular calcium concentration ⁇ e.g., a membrane permeable calcium sensitivity dye such as Fluo-3, Fluo-4 or Fura-2 (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, CA), each of which produce a fluorescent signal when bound to C ⁇ t + ). Such contact is preferably carried out by one or more incubations of the cells in buffer or culture medium comprising either or both of the compound and the indicator in solution.
  • an indicator of intracellular calcium concentration e.g., a membrane permeable calcium sensitivity dye such as Fluo-3, Fluo-4 or Fura-2 (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, CA)
  • P2X 7 receptor agonist e.g., ATP or 2'(3')-O- (4-benzoyl-benzoyl)adenosine 5'-triphosephate at, for example, a concentration equal to the EC 50 concentration
  • fluorescence response is measured.
  • P2X 7 receptor antagonists When agonist- contacted cells are contacted with a compound that is a P2X 7 receptor antagonist, the fluorescence response is generally reduced by at least 20%, preferably at least 50% and more preferably at least 80%, as compared to cells that are contacted with the agonist in the absence of test compound.
  • P2X 7 receptor antagonists provided herein exhibit no detectable agonist activity an in vitro assay of P2X 7 receptor agonism at a concentration of compound equal to the IC 50 .
  • Certain such antagonists exhibit no detectable agonist activity an in vitro assay of P2X 7 receptor agonism at a concentration of compound that is 100-fold higher than the IC 50 .
  • P2X 7 receptor modulating activity may also, or alternatively, be assessed using an in vivo pain relief assay as provided in Example 8.
  • Modulators provided herein preferably have a statistically significant specific effect on P2X 7 receptor activity within such a functional assay.
  • preferred modulators are non-sedating.
  • a dose of modulator that is twice the minimum dose sufficient to provide analgesia in an animal model for determining pain relief causes only transient (i.e., lasting for no more than 1 A the time that pain relief lasts) or preferably no statistically significant sedation in an animal model assay of sedation (using the method described by Fitzgerald et al. (1988) Toxicology 49(2-3):433-9).
  • a dose that is five times the minimum dose sufficient to provide analgesia does not produce statistically significant sedation.
  • a modulator provided herein does not produce sedation at intravenous doses of less than 25 mg/kg (preferably less than 10 mg/kg) or at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg (preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg).
  • compounds provided herein may be evaluated for certain pharmacological properties including, but not limited to, oral bioavailability (preferred compounds are orally bioavailable to an extent allowing for therapeutically effective concentrations of the compound to be achieved at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg, preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg, even more preferably less than 10 mg/kg, still more preferably less than 1 mg/kg and most preferably less than 0.1 mg/kg), toxicity (a preferred compound is nontoxic when a therapeutically effective amount is administered to a subject), side effects (a preferred compound produces side effects comparable to placebo when a therapeutically effective amount of the compound is administered to a subject), serum protein binding and in vitro and in vivo half-life (a preferred compound exhibits an in vivo half-life allowing for Q.I.D.
  • differential penetration of the blood brain barrier may be desirable for modulators used to treat pain or neurodegenerative disease by modulating CNS P2X ⁇ receptor activity such that total daily oral doses as described above provide such modulation to a therapeutically effective extent, while low brain levels of modulators used to treat peripheral nerve mediated pain or certain inflammatory diseases (e.g. rheumatoid arthritis) may be preferred (i.e., such doses do not provide brain (e.g., CSF) levels of the compound sufficient to significantly modulate P2X 7 receptor activity).
  • CNS P2X ⁇ receptor activity preferably T.I.D. dosing, more preferably B. LD. dosing, and most preferably once-a-day dosing.
  • modulators used to treat pain or neurodegenerative disease by modulating CNS P2X ⁇ receptor activity such that total daily oral doses as described above provide such modulation to a therapeutically effective extent
  • low brain levels of modulators used to treat peripheral nerve mediated pain or certain inflammatory diseases e.g. rheuma
  • Routine assays that are well known in the art may be used to assess these properties, and identify superior compounds for a particular use.
  • assays used to predict bioavailability include transport across human intestinal cell monolayers, including Caco-2 cell monolayers.
  • Penetration of the blood brain barrier of a compound in humans may be predicted from the brain levels of the compound in laboratory animals given the compound (e.g., intravenously).
  • Serum protein binding may be predicted from albumin binding assays.
  • Compound half-life is inversely proportional to the frequency of dosage of a compound. In vitro half-lives of compounds may be predicted from assays of microsomal half-life as described, for example, within Example 7 of U.S. Patent Application Publication Number 2005/0070547.
  • nontoxic shall be understood in a relative sense and is intended to refer to any substance that has been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration (“FDA”) for administration to mammals (preferably humans) or, in keeping with established criteria, is susceptible to approval by the FDA for administration to mammals (preferably humans).
  • FDA United States Food and Drug Administration
  • a highly preferred nontoxic compound generally satisfies one or more of the following criteria: (1) does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production; (2) does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals; (3) does not cause substantial liver enlargement, or (4) does not cause substantial release of liver enzymes.
  • a compound that does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production is a compound that satisfies the criteria set forth in Example 8 of U.S. Patent Application Publication Number 2005/0070547.
  • cells treated as described therein with 100 ⁇ M of such a compound exhibit ATP levels that are at least 50% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells.
  • such cells exhibit ATP levels that are at least 80% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells.
  • a compound that does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals is a compound that does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals (as determined by electrocardiography) in guinea pigs, minipigs or dogs upon administration of a dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC 50 or IC 50 for the compound.
  • a dose of 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals.
  • a compound does not cause substantial liver enlargement if daily treatment of laboratory rodents (e.g., mice or rats) for 5-10 days with a dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC 50 or IC 50 for the compound results in an increase in liver to body weight ratio that is no more than 100% over matched controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not cause liver enlargement of more than 75% or 50% over matched controls. If non-rodent mammals (e.g., dogs) are used, such doses should not result in an increase of liver to body weight ratio of more than 50%, preferably not more than 25%, and more preferably not more than 10% over matched untreated controls. Preferred doses within such assays include 0.01, 0.05. 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally.
  • a compound does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes if administration of twice the minimum dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC 50 or IC 5O at P2X 7 receptor for the compound does not elevate serum levels of ALT, LDH or AST in laboratory animals (e.g., rodents) by more than 100% over matched mock-treated controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not elevate such serum levels by more than 75% or 50% over matched controls.
  • a compound does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes if, in an in vitro hepatocyte assay, concentrations (in culture media or other such solutions that are contacted and incubated with hepatocytes in vitro) that are equal to the EC 50 or IC 50 for the compound do not cause detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels seen in media from matched mock-treated control cells. In more highly preferred embodiments, there is no detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels when such compound concentrations are five-fold, and preferably ten-fold the EC50 or IC 50 for the compound.
  • certain preferred compounds do not inhibit or induce microsomal cytochrome P450 enzyme activities, such as CYP1A2 activity, CYP2A6 activity, CYP2C9 activity, CYP2C19 activity, CYP2D6 activity, CYP2E1 activity or
  • CYP3A4 activity at a concentration equal to the EC 50 or IC 5O at P2X 7 receptor for the compound.
  • Certain preferred compounds are not clastogenic (e.g., as determined using a mouse erythrocyte precursor cell micronucleus assay, an Ames micronucleus assay, a spiral micronucleus assay or the like) at a concentration equal the EC 5 Q or IC 5 Q for the compound.
  • certain preferred compounds do not induce sister chromatid exchange (e.g., in Chinese hamster ovary cells) at such concentrations.
  • modulators provided herein may be isotopically-labeled or radiolabeled.
  • compounds may have one or more atoms replaced by an atom of the same element having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature.
  • isotopes that can be present in the compounds provided herein include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2 H, 3 H, 11 C, 13 C, 14 C, 15 N, 18 O, 17 O, 31 P, P, 35 S, 18 F and 36 Cl.
  • substitution with heavy isotopes such as deuterium (i.e., H) can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements and, hence, may be preferred in some circumstances.
  • Compounds may be radiolabeled by carrying out their synthesis using precursors comprising at least one atom that is a radioisotope.
  • Each radioisotope is preferably carbon (e.g., 14 C), hydrogen (e.g., 3 H), sulfur (e.g., 35 S), or iodine (e.g., I).
  • Tritium labeled compounds may also be prepared catalytically via platinum- catalyzed exchange in tritiated acetic acid, acid-catalyzed exchange in tritiated trifluoroacetic acid, or heterogeneous-catalyzed exchange with tritium gas using the compound as substrate.
  • certain precursors may be subjected to tritium- halogen exchange with tritium gas, tritium gas reduction of unsaturated bonds, or reduction using sodium borotritide, as appropriate.
  • Preparation of radiolabeled compounds may be conveniently performed by a radioisotope supplier specializing in custom synthesis of radiolabeled probe compounds. PREPARATION OF HETEROARYL AMIDE ANALOGUES
  • Heteroaryl amide analogues may generally be prepared using standard synthetic methods. Starting materials are commercially available from suppliers such as Sigma-Aldrich Corp. (St. Louis, MO), or may be synthesized from commercially available precursors using established protocols. By way of example, a synthetic route similar to that shown in any of the following Schemes may be used, together with synthetic methods known in the art of synthetic organic chemistry. In some cases, protecting groups may be required during preparation. Such protecting groups can be removed by methods well known to those of ordinary skill in the art, such as methods described in Greene and Wuts, "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis” (2 nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1991) or Philip J.
  • Schemes 1-8 illustrate certain embodiments of the present invention, and are intended to be exemplary only, and nonlimiting. For example, it will be apparent that each reaction described in a Scheme may be performed in combination with none, some or all of the other reactions described therein. In addition, various modifications to reaction conditions will be apparent, including the use of different solvents and acids/bases, and changes in reaction times and temperatures. All processes disclosed in association with the present invention are contemplated to be practiced on any scale, including milligram, gram, multigram, kilogram, multikilogram or commercial industrial scale. It will further be apparent that starting materials for each step, and each reaction product, may be the indicated compound or may be a salt (e.g., a pharmaceutically acceptable salt) or solvate (e.g., hydrate) thereof. Unless otherwise specified, each variable in the following Schemes is as defined above.
  • n an integer (e g , from 1 to 8)
  • L leaving group
  • Scheme 6 illustrates a general method of preparing certain intermediates NH 2 -
  • Scheme 7 illustrates a general method of preparing certain intermediates NH 2 - CH 2 -CHR 5 -Y or NH 2 -CH 2 -CR 5 R 5 -Y of Formula X wherein Y is substituted phenyl or heteroaryl.
  • compositions comprising one or more compounds provided herein, together with at least one physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions may comprise, for example, one or more of water, buffers (e.g., sodium bicarbonate, neutral buffered saline or phosphate buffered saline), ethanol, mineral oil, vegetable oil, dimethylsulfoxide, carbohydrates (e.g., glucose, mannose, sucrose, starch, mannitol or dextrans), proteins, adjuvants, polypeptides or amino acids such as glycine, antioxidants, chelating agents such as EDTA or glutathione and/or preservatives.
  • other active ingredients may (but need not) be included in the pharmaceutical compositions provided herein.
  • compositions may be formulated for any appropriate manner of administration, including, for example, topical, oral, nasal, rectal or parenteral administration.
  • parenteral as used herein includes subcutaneous, intradermal, intravascular (e.g., intravenous), intramuscular, spinal, intracranial, intrathecal and intraperitoneal injection, as well as any similar injection or infusion technique.
  • compositions suitable for oral use are preferred. Such compositions include, for example, tablets, troches, lozenges, aqueous or oily suspensions, dispersible powders or granules, emulsion, hard or soft capsules, or syrups or elixirs.
  • pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated as a lyophilizate.
  • Formulation for topical administration may be preferred for certain conditions (e.g., in the treatment of skin conditions such as burns or itch).
  • Formulation for direct administration into the bladder may be preferred for treatment of urinary incontinence and overactive bladder.
  • Compositions intended for oral use may further comprise one or more components such as sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and/or preserving agents in order to provide appealing and palatable preparations.
  • Tablets contain the active ingredient in admixture with physiologically acceptable excipients that are suitable for the manufacture of tablets.
  • excipients include, for example, inert diluents (e.g., calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate), granulating and disintegrating agents (e.g., corn starch or alginic acid), binding agents (e.g., starch, gelatin or acacia) and lubricating agents (e.g., magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc). Tablets may be formed using standard techniques, including dry granulation, direct compression and wet granulation. The tablets may be uncoated or they may be coated by known techniques.
  • Formulations for oral use may also be presented as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent (e.g., calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin), or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium (e.g., peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil).
  • an inert solid diluent e.g., calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin
  • an oil medium e.g., peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil
  • Aqueous suspensions contain the active material(s) in admixture with suitable excipients, such as suspending agents (e.g., sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydropropylmethylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia); and dispersing or wetting agents (e.g., naturally- occurring phosphatides such as lecithin, condensation products of an alkylene oxide with fatty acids such as polyoxyethylene stearate, condensation products of ethylene oxide with long chain aliphatic alcohols such as heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol, condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and a hexitol such as polyoxyethylene sorbitol monooleate, or condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides such as polyethylene sorbitan monooleate).
  • suspending agents e.g., sodium carboxymethyl
  • Aqueous suspensions may also comprise one or more preservatives, such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents, and/or one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose or saccharin.
  • Oily suspensions may be formulated by suspending the active ingredient(s) in a vegetable oil (e.g., arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil or coconut oil) or in a mineral oil such as liquid paraffin.
  • the oily suspensions may contain a thickening agent such as beeswax, hard paraffin or cetyl alcohol.
  • Sweetening agents such as those set forth above, and/or flavoring agents may be added to provide palatable oral preparations.
  • Such suspensions may be preserved by the addition of an anti-oxidant such as ascorbic acid.
  • Dispersible powders and granules suitable for preparation of an aqueous suspension by the addition of water provide the active ingredient in admixture with a dispersing or wetting agent, a suspending agent and one or more preservatives.
  • a dispersing or wetting agent e.g., a suspending agent
  • Suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents are exemplified by those already mentioned above. Additional excipients, such as sweetening, flavoring and coloring agents, may also be present.
  • compositions may also be formulated as oil-in-water emulsions.
  • the oily phase may be a vegetable oil (e.g., olive oil or arachis oil), a mineral oil (e.g., liquid paraffin) or a mixture thereof.
  • Suitable emulsifying agents include naturally-occurring gums (e.g., gum acacia or gum tragacanth), naturally- occurring phosphatides (e.g., soy bean lecithin, and esters or partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol), anhydrides (e.g., sorbitan monoleate) and condensation products of partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol with ethylene oxide ⁇ e.g., polyoxy ethylene sorbitan monoleate).
  • An emulsion may also comprise one or more sweetening and/or flavoring agents.
  • Syrups and elixirs may be formulated with sweetening agents, such as glycerol, propylene glycol, sorbitol or sucrose. Such formulations may also comprise one or more demulcents, preservatives, flavoring agents and/or coloring agents.
  • sweetening agents such as glycerol, propylene glycol, sorbitol or sucrose.
  • Such formulations may also comprise one or more demulcents, preservatives, flavoring agents and/or coloring agents.
  • Formulations for topical administration typically comprise a topical vehicle combined with active agent(s), with or without additional optional components.
  • Suitable topical vehicles and additional components are well known in the art, and it will be apparent that the choice of a vehicle will depend on the particular physical form and mode of delivery.
  • Topical vehicles include water; organic solvents such as alcohols ⁇ e.g., ethanol or isopropyl alcohol) or glycerin; glycols ⁇ e.g., butylene, isoprene or propylene glycol); aliphatic alcohols ⁇ e.g., lanolin); mixtures of water and organic solvents and mixtures of organic solvents such as alcohol and glycerin; lipid- based materials such as fatty acids, acylglycerols (including oils, such as mineral oil, and fats of natural or synthetic origin), phosphoglycerides, sphingolipids and waxes; protein-based materials such as collagen and gelatin; silicone-based materials (both non-volatile and volatile); and hydrocarbon-based materials such as microsponges and polymer matrices.
  • organic solvents such as alcohols ⁇ e.g., ethanol or isopropyl alcohol) or glycerin
  • glycols ⁇ e.g., butylene,
  • a composition may further include one or more components adapted to improve the stability or effectiveness of the applied formulation, such as stabilizing agents, suspending agents, emulsifying agents, viscosity adjusters, gelling agents, preservatives, antioxidants, skin penetration enhancers, moisturizers and sustained release materials.
  • stabilizing agents such as stabilizing agents, suspending agents, emulsifying agents, viscosity adjusters, gelling agents, preservatives, antioxidants, skin penetration enhancers, moisturizers and sustained release materials.
  • stabilizing agents such as hydroxymethylcellulose or gelatin-microcapsules, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nanoparticles or nanocapsules.
  • a topical formulation may be prepared in any of a variety of physical forms including, for example, solids, pastes, creams, foams, lotions, gels, powders, aqueous liquids and emulsions.
  • the physical appearance and viscosity of such pharmaceutically acceptable forms can be governed by the presence and amount of emulsifier(s) and viscosity adjuster(s) present in the formulation.
  • Solids are generally firm and non-pourable and commonly are formulated as bars or sticks, or in particulate form; solids can be opaque or transparent, and optionally can contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product.
  • Creams and lotions are often similar to one another, differing mainly in their viscosity; both lotions and creams may be opaque, translucent or clear and often contain emulsifiers, solvents, and viscosity adjusting agents, as well as moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product.
  • Gels can be prepared with a range of viscosities, from thick or high viscosity to thin or low viscosity.
  • These formulations may also contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product.
  • Liquids are thinner than creams, lotions, or gels and often do not contain emulsifiers.
  • Liquid topical products often contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product.
  • Suitable emulsifiers for use in topical formulations include, but are not limited to, ionic emulsifiers, cetearyl alcohol, non-ionic emulsifiers like poly oxy ethylene oleyl ether, PEG-40 stearate, ceteareth-12, ceteareth-20, ceteareth-30, ceteareth alcohol, PEG-100 stearate and glyceryl stearate.
  • Suitable viscosity adjusting agents include, but are not limited to, protective colloids or non-ionic gums such as hydroxyethylcellulose, xanthan gum, magnesium aluminum silicate, silica, microcrystalline wax, beeswax, paraffin, and cetyl palmitate.
  • a gel composition may be formed by the addition of a gelling agent such as chitosan, methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, polyvinyl alcohol, polyquaterniums, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, carbomer or ammoniated glycyrrhizinate.
  • a gelling agent such as chitosan, methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, polyvinyl alcohol, polyquaterniums, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, carbomer or ammoniated glycyrrhizinate.
  • Suitable surfactants include, but are not limited to, nonionic, amphoteric, ionic and anionic surfactants.
  • dimethicone copolyol polysorbate 20, polysorbate 40, polysorbate 60, polysorbate 80, lauramide DEA, cocamide DEA, and cocamide MEA, oleyl betaine, cocamidopropyl phosphatidyl PG-dimonium chloride, and ammonium laureth sulfate may be used within topical formulations.
  • Suitable preservatives include, but are not limited to, antimicrobials such as methylparaben, propylparaben, sorbic acid, benzoic acid, and formaldehyde, as well as physical stabilizers and antioxidants such as vitamin E, sodium ascorbate/ascorbic acid and propyl gallate.
  • Suitable moisturizers include, but are not limited to, lactic acid and other hydroxy acids and their salts, glycerin, propylene glycol, and butylene glycol.
  • Suitable emollients include lanolin alcohol, lanolin, lanolin derivatives, cholesterol, petrolatum, isostearyl neopentanoate and mineral oils.
  • Suitable fragrances and colors include, but are not limited to, FD&C Red No. 40 and FD&C Yellow No. 5.
  • Suitable additional ingredients include, but are not limited to, abrasives, absorbents, anti-caking agents, anti-foaming agents, anti-static agents, astringents (e.g., witch hazel, alcohol and herbal extracts such as chamomile extract), binders/excipients, buffering agents, chelating agents, film forming agents, conditioning agents, propellants, opacifying agents, pH adjusters and protectants.
  • An example of a suitable topical vehicle for formulation of a gel is: hydroxypropylcellulose (2.1%); 70/30 isopropyl alcohol/water (90.9%); propylene glycol (5.1%); and Polysorbate 80 (1.9%).
  • An example of a suitable topical vehicle for formulation as a foam is: cetyl alcohol (1.1%); stearyl alcohol (0.5%; Quaternium 52 (1.0%); propylene glycol (2.0%); Ethanol 95 PGF3 (61.05%); deionized water (30.05%); P75 hydrocarbon propellant (4.30%). All percents are by weight.
  • Typical modes of delivery for topical compositions include application using the fingers; application using a physical applicator such as a cloth, tissue, swab, stick or brush; spraying (including mist, aerosol or foam spraying); dropper application; sprinkling; soaking; and rinsing.
  • a pharmaceutical composition may be prepared as a sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspension.
  • the compound(s) provided herein, depending on the vehicle and concentration used, can either be suspended or dissolved in the vehicle.
  • composition may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing, wetting agents and/or suspending agents such as those mentioned above.
  • acceptable vehicles and solvents water, 1,3- butanediol, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution.
  • sterile, fixed oils may be employed as a solvent or suspending medium.
  • any bland fixed oil may be employed, including synthetic mono- or diglycerides.
  • fatty acids such as oleic acid find use in the preparation of injectible compositions, and adjuvants such as local anesthetics, preservatives and/or buffering agents can be dissolved in the vehicle.
  • compositions may also be formulated as suppositories (e.g., for rectal administration).
  • Such compositions can be prepared by mixing the drug with a suitable non-irritating excipient that is solid at ordinary temperatures but liquid at the rectal temperature and will therefore melt in the rectum to release the drug.
  • Suitable excipients include, for example, cocoa butter and polyethylene glycols.
  • compositions for inhalation typically can be provided in the form of a solution, suspension or emulsion that can be administered as a dry powder or in the form of an aerosol using a conventional propellant (e.g., dichlorodifiuoromethane or trichlorofluoromethane) .
  • a conventional propellant e.g., dichlorodifiuoromethane or trichlorofluoromethane
  • compositions may be formulated for release at a predetermined rate.
  • Instantaneous release may be achieved, for example, via sublingual administration (i.e., administration by mouth in such a way that the active ingredient(s) are rapidly absorbed via the blood vessels under the tongue rather than via the digestive tract).
  • Controlled release formulations i.e., formulations such as a capsule, tablet or coated tablet that slows and/or delays release of active ingredient(s) following administration
  • a controlled release formulation comprises a matrix and/or coating that delays disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract (or implantation site) and thereby provides a delayed action or a sustained action over a longer period.
  • One type of controlled- release formulation is a sustained-release formulation, in which at least one active ingredient is continuously released over a period of time at a constant rate.
  • the therapeutic agent is released at such a rate that blood (e.g., plasma) concentrations are maintained within the therapeutic range, but below toxic levels, over a period of time that is at least 4 hours, preferably at least 8 hours, and more preferably at least 12 hours.
  • Such formulations may generally be prepared using well known technology and administered by, for example, oral, rectal or subcutaneous implantation, or by implantation at the desired target site.
  • Carriers for use within such formulations are biocompatible, and may also be biodegradable; preferably the formulation provides a relatively constant level of modulator release.
  • the amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the site of implantation, the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
  • Controlled release may be achieved by combining the active ingredient(s) with a matrix material that itself alters release rate and/or through the use of a controlled- release coating.
  • the release rate can be varied using methods well known in the art, including (a) varying the thickness or composition of coating, (b) altering the amount or manner of addition of plasticizer in a coating, (c) including additional ingredients, such as release-modifying agents, (d) altering the composition, particle size or particle shape of the matrix, and (e) providing one or more passageways through the coating.
  • the amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the method of administration (e.g., the site of implantation), the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
  • the matrix material which itself may or may not serve a controlled-release function, is generally any material that supports the active ingredient(s).
  • a time delay material such as glyceryl monosterate or glyceryl distearate may be employed.
  • Active ingredient(s) may be combined with matrix material prior to formation of the dosage form (e.g., a tablet).
  • active ingredient(s) may be coated on the surface of a particle, granule, sphere, microsphere, bead or pellet that comprises the matrix material. Such coating may be achieved by conventional means, such as by dissolving the active ingredient(s) in water or other suitable solvent and spraying.
  • additional ingredients are added prior to coating (e.g., to assist binding of the active ingredient(s) to the matrix material or to color the solution).
  • the matrix may then be coated with a barrier agent prior to application of controlled-release coating. Multiple coated matrix units may, if desired, be encapsulated to generate the final dosage form.
  • a controlled release is achieved through the use of a controlled release coating (i.e., a coating that permits release of active ingredient(s) at a controlled rate in aqueous medium).
  • the controlled release coating should be a strong, continuous film that is smooth, capable of supporting pigments and other additives, non-toxic, inert and tack-free.
  • Coatings that regulate release of the modulator include pH-independent coatings, pH-dependent coatings (which may be used to release modulator in the stomach) and enteric coatings (which allow the formulation to pass intact through the stomach and into the small intestine, where the coating dissolves and the contents are absorbed by the body).
  • pH dependent coatings include, for example, shellac, cellulose acetate phthalate, polyvinyl acetate phthalate, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate, methacrylic acid ester copolymers and zein.
  • the coating is a hydrophobic material, preferably used in an amount effective to slow the hydration of the gelling agent following administration.
  • Suitable hydrophobic materials include alkyl celluloses (e.g., ethylcellulose or carboxymethylcellulose), cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, acrylic polymers (e.g., poly(acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethoxy ethyl methacrylates, cyanoethyl methacrylate, methacrylic acid alkamide copolymer, poly(methyl methacrylate), polyacrylamide, ammonio methacrylate copolymers, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer, poly(methacrylic acid anhydride) and glycidyl methacrylate copolymers) and mixtures of the foregoing.
  • Representative aqueous dispersions of ethylcellulose include, for example, AQUACO AT® (FMC Corp., Philadelphia, PA) and SURELEASE® (Colorcon, Inc., West Point, PA), both of which can be applied to the substrate according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Representative acrylic polymers include, for example, the various EUDRAGIT® (Rohm America, Piscataway, NJ) polymers, which may be used singly or in combination depending on the desired release profile, according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • Suitable plasticizers for alkyl celluloses include, for example, dibutyl sebacate, diethyl phthalate, triethyl citrate, tributyl citrate and triacetin.
  • Suitable plasticizers for acrylic polymers include, for example, citric acid esters such as triethyl citrate and tributyl citrate, dibutyl phthalate, polyethylene glycols, propylene glycol, diethyl phthalate, castor oil and triacetin.
  • Controlled-release coatings are generally applied using conventional techniques, such as by spraying in the form of an aqueous dispersion.
  • the coating may comprise pores or channels or to facilitate release of active ingredient. Pores and channels may be generated by well known methods, including the addition of organic or inorganic material that is dissolved, extracted or leached from the coating in the environment of use.
  • pore-forming materials include hydrophilic polymers, such as hydroxyalkylcelluloses (e.g., hydroxypropylmethylcellulose), cellulose ethers, synthetic water-soluble polymers (e.g., polyvinylpyrrolidone, cross-linked polyvinylpyrrolidone and polyethylene oxide), water-soluble polydextrose, saccharides and polysaccharides and alkali metal salts.
  • a controlled release coating may include one or more orifices, which may be formed my methods such as those described in US Patent Nos. 3,845,770; 4,034,758; 4,077,407; 4,088,864; 4,783,337 and 5,071,607. Controlled-release may also be achieved through the use of transdermal patches, using conventional technology (see, e.g., US Patent No. 4,668,232).
  • controlled release formulations and components thereof, may be found, for example, in US Patent Nos. 4,572,833; 4,587,117; 4,606,909; 4,610,870; 4,684,516; 4,777,049; 4,994,276; 4,996,058; 5,128,143; 5,202,128;
  • a compound provided herein may be conveniently added to food or drinking water (e.g., for administration to non-human animals including companion animals (such as dogs and cats) and livestock).
  • Animal feed and drinking water compositions may be formulated so that the animal takes in an appropriate quantity of the composition along with its diet. It may also be convenient to present the composition as a premix for addition to feed or drinking water.
  • Compounds are generally administered in a therapeutically effective amount.
  • Preferred systemic doses are no higher than 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day (e.g., ranging from about 0.001 mg to about 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day), with oral doses generally being about 5-20 fold higher than intravenous doses (e.g., ranging from 0.01 to 40 mg per kilogram of body weight per day).
  • the amount of active ingredient that may be combined with the carrier materials to produce a single dosage unit will vary depending, for example, upon the patient being treated, the particular mode of administration and any other coadministered drugs. Dosage units generally contain between from about 10 ⁇ g to about 500 mg of active ingredient. Optimal dosages may be established using routine testing, and procedures that are well known in the art.
  • compositions may be packaged for treating conditions responsive to P2X 7 receptor modulation (e.g., pain, inflammation, neurodegeneration or other condition described herein).
  • Packaged pharmaceutical compositions generally include (i) a container holding a pharmaceutical composition that comprises at least one modulator as described herein and (ii) instructions (e.g., labeling or a package insert) indicating that the contained composition is to be used for treating a condition responsive to P2X 7 receptor modulation in the patient.
  • P2X 7 receptor modulators may be used to alter activity and/or activation of P2X 7 receptors in a variety of contexts, both in vitro and in vivo.
  • P2X 7 receptor antagonists may be used to inhibit the binding of ligand agonist to P2X 7 receptor in vitro or in vivo.
  • such methods comprise the step of contacting a P2X 7 receptor with one or more P2X 7 receptor modulators provided herein, in the presence of ligand in aqueous solution and under conditions otherwise suitable for binding of the ligand to P2X 7 receptor.
  • the modulator(s) are generally present at a concentration that is sufficient to alter P2X 7 receptor-mediated signal transduction (using an assay provided in Example 7).
  • the P2X 7 receptor may be present in solution or suspension (e.g., in an isolated membrane or cell preparation), or in a cultured or isolated cell.
  • the P2X 7 receptor is expressed by a cell that is present in a patient, and the aqueous solution is a body fluid.
  • one or more modulators are administered to an animal in an amount such that the modulator is present in at least one body fluid of the animal at a therapeutically effective concentration that is 20 micromolar or less, 10 micromolar or less, 5 micromolar or less, or 1 micromolar or less.
  • such compounds may be administered at a therapeutically effective dose that is less than 20 mg/kg body weight, preferably less than 5 mg/kg and, in some instances, less than 1 mg/kg.
  • modulation may be achieved by contacting a P2X 7 receptor (either in vitro or in vivo) with one or more modulators provided herein under conditions suitable for binding of the modulator(s) to the receptor.
  • the modulator(s) are generally present at a concentration that is sufficient to alter P2X 7 receptor- mediated signal transduction as described herein.
  • the receptor may be present in solution or suspension, in a cultured or isolated cell preparation or in a cell within a patient. For example, the cell may be contacted in vivo in an animal.
  • Modulation of signal tranducing activity may be assessed by detecting an effect on calcium ion conductance (also referred to as calcium mobilization or flux). Modulation of signal transducing activity may alternatively be assessed by detecting an alteration of a symptom (e.g., pain or inflammation) of a patient being treated with one or more modulators provided herein.
  • P2X 7 receptor modulator(s) provided herein are preferably administered to a patient (e.g., a human) orally or topically, and are present within at least one body fluid of the animal while modulating P2X 7 receptor signal-transducing activity.
  • the present invention further provides methods for treating conditions responsive to P2X 7 receptor modulation.
  • treatment encompasses both disease-modifying treatment and symptomatic treatment, either of which may be prophylactic (i.e., before the onset of symptoms, in order to prevent, delay or reduce the severity of symptoms) or therapeutic (i.e., after the onset of symptoms, in order to reduce the severity and/or duration of symptoms).
  • a condition is "responsive to P2X 7 receptor modulation” if it is characterized by inappropriate activity of a P2X 7 receptor, regardless of the amount of P2X 7 agonist present locally, and/or if modulation of P2X 7 receptor activity results in alleviation of the condition or a symptom thereof.
  • Such conditions include, for example, pain, inflammation, cardiovascular disorders, ocular disorders, neurodegenerative disorders and respiratory disorders (such as cough, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, chronic bronchitis, cystic fibrosis and rhinitis, including allergic rhinitis, such as seasonal an perennial rhinitis, and non-allergic rhinitis), fibrosis as well as other conditions described in more detail below.
  • Such conditions may be diagnosed and monitored using criteria that have been established in the art. Patients may include humans, domesticated companion animals and livestock, with dosages as described above.
  • Treatment regimens may vary depending on the compound used and the particular condition to be treated; however, for treatment of most disorders, a frequency of administration of 4 times daily or less is preferred. In general, a dosage regimen of 2 times daily is more preferred, with once a day dosing particularly preferred. For the treatment of acute pain, a single dose that rapidly reaches effective concentrations is desirable. It will be understood, however, that the specific dose level and treatment regimen for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the specific compound employed, the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion, drug combination and the severity of the particular disease undergoing therapy. In general, the use of the minimum dose sufficient to provide effective therapy is preferred. Patients may generally be monitored for therapeutic effectiveness using medical or veterinary criteria suitable for the condition being treated or prevented.
  • Pain that may be treated using the modulators provided herein includes, for example, acute, chronic, inflammatory, and neuropathic pain.
  • Specific pain indications that may be treated as described herein include, but are not limited to, pain associated with osteoarthritis or rheumatoid arthritis; various neuropathic pain syndromes (such as post-herpetic neuralgia, trigeminal neuralgia, reflex sympathetic dystrophy, diabetic neuropathy, Guillian Barre syndrome, fibromyalgia, oral neuropathic pain, phantom limb pain, post-mastectomy pain, peripheral neuropathy, myofascial pain syndromes, MS-related neuropathy, HIV or AIDS-related neuropathy, and chemotherapy-induced and other iatrogenic neuropathies); visceral pain, (such as that associated with gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD), irritable bowel syndrome, inflammatory bowel disease, pancreatitis, intestinal gas, gynecological disorders (e.g., menstrual pain
  • Further pain conditions that can be treated as described herein include Charcot's pains, ear pain, muscle pain, eye pain, orofacial pain (e.g., odontalgia), carpel tunnel syndrome, acute and chronic back pain (e.g., lower back pain), gout, scar pain, hemorrhoidal pain, dyspeptic pains, angina, nerve root pain, "non-painful” neuropathies, complex regional pain syndrome, homotopic pain and heterotopic pain - including pain associated with carcinoma, often referred to as cancer-associated pain (e.g., in patients with bone cancer), pain (and inflammation) associated with venom exposure (e.g., due to snake bite, spider bite, or insect sting) and trauma- associated pain (e.g., post-surgical pain, episiotomy pain, pain from cuts, musculoskeletal pain, bruises and broken bones, and burn pain, especially primary hyperalgesia associated therewith).
  • Additional pain conditions that may be treated as described herein include pain associated with autoimmune diseases
  • Conditions associated with inflammation and/or immune system disorders include, but are not limited to, arthritis (including osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriatic arthritis, Reiter's syndrome, gout, traumatic arthritis, rubella arthritis, rheumatoid spondylitis, gouty arthritis and juvenile arthritis); cystic fibrosis; uveitis; systemic lupus erythematosus (and associated glomerulonephritis); spondyloarthropathies; psoriasis; scleritis; allergic conditions (including allergic reactions, allergic rhinitis, allergic contact hypersensitivity, allergic dermatitis, eczema and contact dermatitis), reperfusion injury (e.g., cardiac and renal reperfusion injury), respiratory system disorders (including hyper-responsiveness of the airway, cough, asthma (e.g., to prevent or decrease the severity of both acute early phase asthma attack and the late phase
  • arthritis including osteoarthritis,
  • pathologic sequellae associated with insulin- dependent diabetes mellitus including diabetic retinopathy
  • lupus nephropathy including diabetic retinopathy
  • Heyman nephritis membranous nephritis and other forms of glomerulonephritis
  • macular degeneration e.g., contact sensitivity responses, and inflammation resulting from contact of blood with artificial surfaces as occurs, for example, during extracorporeal circulation of blood (e.g., during hemodialysis or via a heart-lung machine, for example, in association with vascular surgery such as coronary artery bypass grafting or heart valve replacement) such as extracorporeal post-dialysis syndrome, or in association with contact with other artificial vessel or container surfaces (e.g., ventricular assist devices, artificial heart machines, transfusion tubing, blood storage bags, plasmapheresis, plateletpheresis, and the like).
  • other artificial vessel or container surfaces e.g., ventricular assist devices, artificial heart machines, transfusion
  • Cardiovascular disorders such as cardiovascular disease, stroke, cerebral ischemia, myocardial infarction, atherosclerosis, ischemic heart disease, ischemia- reperfusion injury, aortic aneurysm, and congestive heart failure;
  • Ocular disorders such as glaucoma
  • Neurological disorders e.g., neurodegeneration
  • neurodegenerative conditions associated with progressive CNS disorders including, but not limited to,
  • Centrally-mediated neuropsychiatric disorders such as depression, depression mania, bipolar disease, anxiety, schizophrenia, eating disorders, sleep disorders and cognition disorders; and Other disorders, such as cirrhosis, interstitial fibrosis, prostate, bladder and bowel dysfunction (e.g., urinary incontinence, urinary hesitancy, rectal hypersensitivity, fecal incontinence and benign prostatic hypertrophy); itch/pruritus; obesity; lipid disorders; cancer; hypertension; renal disorders; abnormal wound healing; myoblastic leukemia; diabetes; meningitis; varicose veins; muscle degeneration; cachexia; restenosis; thrombosis; cerebral malaria; disorders of bones and joints (e.g., osteoporosis, bone resorption disease, loosening of artificial joint implants, and others listed above); epidermolysis bullosa; ocular angiogenesis; corneal injury; corneal scarring; and tissue ulceration. Modulators provided herein may also be used for neuroprotecti
  • modulators provided herein may be used within combination therapy for the treatment of conditions responsive to P2X 7 receptor modulation (e.g., conditions involving pain and/or inflammatory components).
  • conditions responsive to P2X 7 receptor modulation include, for example, autoimmune disorders and pathologic autoimmune responses known to have an inflammatory component including, but not limited to, arthritis (especially rheumatoid arthritis), psoriasis, Crohn's disease, lupus erythematosus, irritable bowel syndrome, tissue graft rejection, and hyperacute rejection of transplanted organs.
  • Other such conditions include trauma (e.g., injury to the head or spinal cord), cardio- and cerebro-vascular disease and certain infectious diseases.
  • a modulator is administered to a patient along with a second therapeutic agent (e.g., an analgesic and/or anti-inflammatory agent).
  • a second therapeutic agent e.g., an analgesic and/or anti-inflammatory agent.
  • the modulator and second therapeutic agent may be present in the same pharmaceutical composition, or may be administered separately in either order.
  • Antiinflammatory agents include, for example, non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs), non-specific and cyclooxygenase-2 (COX-2) specific cyclooxgenase enzyme inhibitors, gold compounds, corticosteroids, methotrexate, leflunomide, cyclosporine A, IM gold, minocycline, azathioprine, tumor necrosis factor (TNF) receptor antagonists, soluble TNF alpha receptor (etanercept), anti-TNF alpha antibodies (e.g., infliximab and adalimumab), anti-C5 antibodies, interleukin-1 (IL-I) receptor antagonists (e.g., anakinra or IL-I trap), IL- 18 binding protein, CTLA4-Ig (e.g., abatacept), anti-human IL-6 receptor monoclonal antibody (e.g., tocilizumab), LFA-3-Ig fusion proteins (e.g., alef
  • NSAIDs include, but are not limited to, ibuprofen, flurbiprofen, naproxen or naproxen sodium, diclofenac, combinations of diclofenac sodium and misoprostol, sulindac, oxaprozin, diflunisal, piroxicam, indomethacin, etodolac, fenoprofen calcium, ketoprofen, sodium nabumetone, sulfasalazine, tolmetin sodium, and hydroxychloroquine.
  • COX cyclooxygenase
  • NSAIDs further include salicylates such as acetylsalicylic acid or aspirin, sodium salicylate, choline and magnesium salicylates, and salsalate, as well as corticosteroids such as cortisone, dexamethasone, methylprednisolone, prednisolone, prednisolone sodium phosphate, and prednisone.
  • salicylates such as acetylsalicylic acid or aspirin
  • sodium salicylate sodium salicylate
  • choline and magnesium salicylates sodium salicylate
  • salsalate sodium salicylate
  • corticosteroids such as cortisone, dexamethasone, methylprednisolone, prednisolone, prednisolone sodium phosphate, and prednisone.
  • Suitable dosages for P2X 7 receptor modulator within such combination therapy are generally as described above. Dosages and methods of administration of anti-inflammatory agents can be found, for example, in the manufacturer's instructions in the Physician's Desk Reference.
  • the combination administration of a modulator with an anti-inflammatory agent results in a reduction of the dosage of the anti-inflammatory agent required to produce a therapeutic effect (i.e., a decrease in the minimum therapeutically effective amount).
  • the dosage of anti-inflammatory agent in a combination or combination treatment method is less than the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the anti-inflammatory agent without combination administration of a modulator.
  • this dosage is less than 3 A, even more preferably less than 1 A, and highly preferably, less than 1 A of the maximum dose, while most preferably the dose is less than 10% of the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the anti-inflammatory agent(s) when administered without combination administration of a modulator. It will be apparent that the dosage amount of modulator component of the combination needed to achieve the desired effect may similarly be reduced by the co-administraction of the anti-inflammatory agent.
  • the combination administration of a modulator with an anti-inflammatory agent is accomplished by packaging one or more modulators and one or more anti-inflammatory agents in the same package, either in separate containers within the package or in the same contained as a mixture of one or more modulators and one or more anti-inflammatory agents.
  • Preferred mixtures are formulated for oral administration (e.g., as pills, capsules, tablets or the like).
  • the package comprises a label bearing indicia indicating that the one or more modulators and one or more anti-inflammatory agents are to be taken together for the treatment of an inflammatory pain condition.
  • modulators provided herein may be used in combination with one or more additional pain relief medications.
  • Certain such medications are also anti-inflammatory agents, and are listed above.
  • Other such medications are analgesic agents, including narcotic agents which typically act at one or more opioid receptor subtypes (e.g., ⁇ , K and/or ⁇ ), preferably as agonists or partial agonists.
  • opioid receptor subtypes e.g., ⁇ , K and/or ⁇
  • Such agents include opiates, opiate derivatives and opioids, as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts and hydrates thereof.
  • narcotic analgesics include, within preferred embodiments, alfentanil, alphaprodine, anileridine, bezitramide, buprenorphine, butorphanol, codeine, diacetyldihydromorphine, diacetylmorphine, dihydrocodeine, diphenoxylate, ethylmorphine, fentanyl, heroin, hydrocodone, hydromorphone, isomethadone, levomethorphan, levorphane, levorphanol, meperidine, metazocine, methadone, methorphan, metopon, morphine, nalbuphine, opium extracts, opium fluid extracts, powdered opium, granulated opium, raw opium, tincture of opium, oxycodone, oxymorphone, paregoric, pentazocine, pethidine, phenazocine, piminodine, propoxyphene, racemethorphan
  • narcotic analgesic agents include acetorphine, acetyldihydrocodeine, acetylmethadol, allylprodine, alphracetylmethadol, alphameprodine, alphamethadol, benzethidine, benzylmorphine, betacetylmethadol, betameprodine, betamethadol, betaprodine, clonitazene, codeine methylbromide, codeine-N-oxide, cyprenorphine, desomorphine, dextromoramide, diampromide, diethylthiambutene, dihydromorphine, dimenoxadol, dimepheptanol, dimethylthiamubutene, dioxaphetyl butyrate, dipipanone, drotebanol, ethanol, ethylmethylthiambutene, etonitazene, e
  • analgesic agents include, for example acetaminophen (paracetamol); aspirin and other NSAIDs described above; NR2B antagonists; bradykinin antagonists; anti-migraine agents; anticonvulsants such as oxcarbazepine and carbamazepine; antidepressants (such as TCAs, SSRIs, SNRIs, substance P antagonists, etc.); spinal blocks; pentazocine/naloxone; meperidine; levorphanol; buprenorphine; hydromorphone; fentanyl; sufentanyl; oxycodone; oxycodone/acetaminophen, nalbuphine and oxymorphone.
  • analgesic agents include CB2-receptor agonists, such as AMI 241, capsaicin receptor antagonists and compounds that bind to the ⁇ 2 ⁇ subunit of voltage-gated calcium channels, such as gabapentin and pregabalin.
  • Representative anti-migraine agents for use in combination with a modulator provided herein include CGRP antagonists, capsaicin receptor antagonists, ergotamines and 5-HT 1 agonists, such as sumatripan, naratriptan, zolmatriptan and rizatriptan.
  • modulators provided herein may be used, for example, in the treatment of pulmonary disorders such as asthma, in combination with one or more beta(2)-adrenergic receptor agonists or leukotriene receptor antagonists
  • CySLT 1 antagonists include montelukast, zafirlukast, and pranlukast.
  • P2X 7 receptor modulators may be administered to the eye in combination with, for example, one or more of an agent that inhibits ATP release, an agent that enhances conversion of ATP to adenosine and/or an agent that inhibits Ca +2 influx into retinal ganglion cells.
  • agents include, for example, adenosine A 3 receptor agonists, adenosine A 1 receptor agonists, ectonucleotidase agonists, Ca + chelating agents and NMDA receptor antagonists.
  • Suitable dosages for P2X 7 receptor modulator within such combination therapy are generally as described above. Dosages and methods of administration of other pain relief medications can be found, for example, in the manufacturer's instructions in the Physician's Desk Reference. In certain embodiments, the combination administration of a modulator with one or more additional pain medications results in a reduction of the dosage of each therapeutic agent required to produce a therapeutic effect ⁇ e.g., the dosage or one or both agent may less than 3 A, less than 1 A, less than 1 A or less than 10% of the maximum dose listed above or advised by the manufacturer). For use in combination therapy, pharmaceutical compositions as described above may further comprise one or more additional medications as described above. In certain such compositions, the additional medication is an analgesic.
  • packaged pharmaceutical preparations comprising one or more modulators and one or more additional medications (e.g., analgesics) in the same package.
  • Such packaged pharmaceutical preparations generally include (i) a container holding a pharmaceutical composition that comprises at least one modulator as described herein; (ii) a container holding a pharmaceutical composition that comprises at least one additional medication (such as a pain relief and/or antiinflammatory medication) as described above and (iii) instructions (e.g., labeling or a package insert) indicating that the compositions are to be used simultaneously, separately or sequentially for treating or preventing a condition responsive to P2X 7 receptor modulation in the patient (such as a condition in which pain and/or inflammation predominates).
  • a condition responsive to P2X 7 receptor modulation such as a condition in which pain and/or inflammation predominates.
  • the present invention provides a variety of non- pharmaceutical in vitro and in vivo uses for the modulator compounds provided herein.
  • such compounds may be labeled and used as probes for the detection and localization of P2X 7 receptor (in samples such as cell preparations or tissue sections, preparations or fractions thereof).
  • modulators provided herein that comprise a suitable reactive group such as an aryl carbonyl, nitro or azide group
  • modulators provided herein may be used in photoaffinity labeling studies of receptor binding sites.
  • modulators provided herein may be used as positive controls in assays for receptor activity or as radiotracers (e.g., in receptor mapping procedures).
  • a modulator compound may be labeled using any of a variety of well known techniques (e.g., radiolabeled with a radionuclide such as tritium, as described herein), and used as a probe for receptor autoradiography (receptor mapping) of P2X 7 receptor in cultured cells or tissue samples, which may be performed as described by Kuhar in sections 8.1.1 to 8.1.9 of Current Protocols in Pharmacology (1998) John Wiley & Sons, New York, which sections are incorporated herein by reference.
  • receptor mapping procedures also include methods that can be used to characterize P2X 7 receptor in living subjects, such as positron emission tomography (PET) imaging or single photon emission computerized tomography (SPECT).
  • PET positron emission tomography
  • SPECT single photon emission computerized tomography
  • Mass spectroscopy data provided herein is Electrospray MS, obtained in positive ion mode. Unless otherwise specified, such data is obtained using a
  • Chromolith SpeedROD RP- 18e column (Merck KGaA, Darmstadt, Germany), and eluted using a 2-phase linear gradient at a flow rate of 6 ml/min. Sample is detected using total absorbance count over the 220-340nm UV range.
  • the elution conditions are: Mobile Phase A - 95% water, 5% MeOH with 0.05% TFA; Mobile Phase B - 5% water, 95% MeOH with 0.025% TFA.
  • the following gradient is used: 0-0.5 min i 0- 100%B, hold at 100%B to 1.2 min, return to 10%B at 1.21 min. Inject to inject cycle is 2.15 min.
  • LC retention times are provided in minutes.
  • Methyl 2-(fluorosulfonyl)difluoroacetate (3.5 mL, 27.6 mmol) and copper (I) iodide (5.3 g, 27.6 mmol) are added to a solution of 4-bromo-l H-indole-3 - carbaldehyde (3.1 g, 13.8 mmol) in 65 mL of DMF.
  • the reaction is heated to 85 0 C for 18 h. After cooling to rt, the mixture is diluted with EtOAc and filtered through celite. The celite is washed well with EtOAc.
  • Step 3 1 -Pyrimidin-2-yl-4-(trifluoromethyl)- 1 H-indole-3 -carbaldehyde
  • Trifluoroacetic anhydride (27.5 mL, 200 mmol) is added to a solution of 4- chloroindole (25.0 g, 165 mmol) and DMF (170 mL) under N 2 over 30 min. The reaction vessel is sealed. After 20 h, the solution is poured into water (700 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (300 mL). The organics are dried over Na 2 SO 4 , filtered, and concentrated. Purification by flash silica gel column chromatography (4:1 hexane/ EtOAc to 1 : 1 hexane/EtOAc) affords the title compound as a red-brown solid.
  • Step 2 1 -(( 1 -Methyl- 1 H-imidazol-2-yl)methyl)- 1 H-indole-2-carboxylic acid
  • Step 4 4-Chloro-N-[(l -pyridin-3 -ylcyclohexyl)methyl]- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H- pyrrolo [2,3 -b]pyridine-3 -carboxamide
  • IC 5O IC 5O
  • a "*" indicates that the IC 50 determined as described in Example 7A is 2 micromolar or less (i.e., the concentration of such compounds that is required to provide a 50% decrease in the fluorescence response of cells exposed to 80 ⁇ M of (2'(3')-O-(4-benzoyl-benzoyl)adenosme 5'-triphosephate is 2 micromolar or less).
  • Mass spectroscopy data is provided in Table I as (M+ 1) in the column headed "M+H.”
  • the LC retention time, in minutes, is provided in the column headed Rj.
  • SH-SY5Y cells ATCC Number CRL-2266, (American Type Culture Collection, Manassas, VA) are cultured under DMEM/High medium supplemented with 10% FBS, and 10 mM HEPES (Invitrogen Corp., Carlsbad, CA) in 5% CO 2 and at 37 °C.
  • DMEM/High medium supplemented with 10% FBS, and 10 mM HEPES (Invitrogen Corp., Carlsbad, CA) in 5% CO 2 and at 37 °C.
  • cells are plated at a density of 100,000 cells/well in a 96 well black/clear TC plate (Corning® Costar®, Sigma-Aldrich Co., St. Louis, MO).
  • the culture medium is removed and cells are incubated with 50 ⁇ L of 2.3 ⁇ M Fluo-4 AM dye (Invitrogen Corp.) in the assay solution (5 mM KCl, 9.6 mM NaH 2 PO 4 H 2 O, 25 mM HEPES, 280 mM Sucrose, 5 mM Glucose, and 0.5 mM CaCl 2 ; pH is adjusted to 7.4 with NaOH) for an hour at 37 °C. After one hour dye incubation, wells are rinsed once with 50 ⁇ L assay solution, and are then incubated for an hour at rt with 100 ⁇ L assay solution containing the test compound.
  • Fluo-4 AM dye Invitrogen Corp.
  • test compound generally ranges from 1 to 2500 nM; for positive control cells, no test compound is added. After the one hour incubation, plates are transferred to a FLIPR TETRA instrument (Molecular Devices, Sunnyvale, CA) for calcium mobilization analysis.
  • the data is analyzed as follows. First, the average maximum relative fluorescent unit (RFU) response from the negative control wells (no agonist) is subtracted from the maximum response detected for each of the other experimental wells. Second, average maximum RFU response is calculated for the positive control wells (agonist wells). Then, percent inhibition for each compound tested is calculated using the equation:
  • Percent Inhibition 100 - 100 x (Peak Signal in Test Cells / Peak Signal in Control Cells)
  • test compound IC 50 is determined using a linear regression in which x is ln(concentration of test compound) and y is ln(percent inhibition ⁇ 100 - percent inhibition). Data with a percent inhibition that is greater than 90% or less than 15% are rejected and are not used in the regression.
  • the IC 50 calculated in this fashion is e ⁇ mtercep s ope '
  • the calculated IC 50 is preferably below 20 micromolar, more preferably below 10 micromolar, even more preferably below 5 micromolar and most preferably below 1 micromolar.
  • test compounds Similar assays are performed in the absence of added agonist for the determination of agonist activity of the test compounds.
  • the ability of a test compound to act as an agonist of P2X ⁇ receptor is determined by measuring the fluorescence response elicited by the test compound as a function of compound concentration.
  • P2X 7 receptor antagonists that exhibit no detectable agonist activity elicit no detectable fluorescence response at a concentration of 2,500 nM.
  • SH-SY5Y cells are cultured under DMEM/High medium supplemented with 10% FBS, and 10 mM HEPES (Invitrogen Corp., Carlsbad, CA) in 5% CO 2 and at 37 °C, and are split onto 12 mm round PoIy-D-Ly sine (PDL) coated coverslips (BD Biosciences, San Jose, CA) in a 35 mm dish with a density of 130K cells/dish a day prior to the experiment.
  • Whole cell voltage clamp recordings are made with the Axopatch-200B amplifier (Axon instruments, Foster City, CA).
  • the recording electrodes are pulled from borosilicate pipettes (World Precision Instruments, Sarasota, FL) on a horizontal puller (Sutter Instrument Model P-87) and have resistances ranging from 2 to 3 M ⁇ when backfilled with internal solution. All voltage protocols are generated using pClamp 8 (Axon Instruments) software. Data are digitized at 1 or 5 kHz and recorded onto a PC for further analysis. Data are analyzed using Clampf ⁇ t (Axon Instruments), Excel (Microsoft, Redmond, WA), and Origin software (MicroCal, LLC; Northampton, MA). All whole-cell recordings are conducted at rt.
  • AU chemicals are from Sigma, unless otherwise stated.
  • P2X 7 receptor is activated by 200 ⁇ M of P2X 7 agonist, BzATP. At a holding potential of -80 mV, the activated inward current is recorded in the presence and absence of the test compound. Then, percent inhibition for each compound tested is calculated using the equation:
  • % Inhibition 100 - 100 x (Current Amplitude in Compound / Current Amplitude in Control).
  • Percent Inhibition 100/(1 + (IC 50 /C) N ) where C is the concentration of the antagonist, N is the Hill coefficient, and IC 50 represents the compound IC 50 value against P2X 7 receptors.
  • This Example illustrates a representative method for assessing the degree of pain relief provided by a test compound.
  • Dawley, Inc., Indianapolis, IN are housed under a 12 h light/dark cycle with access to food and water ad libitum.
  • all animals are habituated once, baselined twice and tested once, with each procedure being conducted on a separate day.
  • animals Prior to each day's procedure, animals are allowed to acclimate for at least 1 hour in the testing room before the start of the procedure.
  • each animal is gently restrained with each hindpaw consecutively extended in front of the animal as is necessary for testing. This procedure is performed by alternating hindpaws and repeated three times for each hindpaw. Animals are then subjected to the first baseline, second baseline and testing on consecutive days.
  • the animal is restrained as in the habituation session and the paw tested using the paw pressure testing apparatus (Digital Randall Selitto, IITC Inc., Woodland Hills, CA). Animals are baselined and tested in groups of ten, each animal being tested once on the left and right hindpaws, followed by the next consecutive animal. This procedure is repeated three times for a total of three measurements on each hindpaw. If any individual read is drastically different (varies by more than about 100 g) from the other two on a given hindpaw, the hindpaw is retested a 4 th time, and the average of the three most consistent scores is used.
  • the paw pressure testing apparatus Digital Randall Selitto, IITC Inc., Woodland Hills, CA.
  • Test compounds or vehicle may be administered by various routes at various timepoints prior to testing, but for any particular assay, the routes and timepoints are the same for animals in each treatment group administered test compound (a different dosage of test compound may be administered to each such group) and those in the treatment group administered vehicle control. If a compound is orally administered, the animals are food-deprived the evening before testing. As with the baseline, each hindpaw is tested three times and the results recorded for analysis.
  • Hypersensitivity of nociception values are calculated for each treatment group as the mean of the left foot gram force scores on test day (left foot only or LFO score). Statistical significance between treatment groups is determined by running an
  • Compounds are said to relieve pain in this model if they result in a statistically significant reduction in hypersensitivity of nociception values compared to vehicle controls, determined as described above, when administered (0.01-50 mg/kg, orally, parenterally or topically) immediately prior to testing as a single bolus, or for several days: once or twice or three times daily prior to testing.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Ophthalmology & Optometry (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)
  • Indole Compounds (AREA)
  • Nitrogen Condensed Heterocyclic Rings (AREA)

Abstract

Compounds, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods of use are disclosed for heteroaryl amide analogues of formula Ia and/or Ib: . In certain embodiments, the heteroaryl amide analogues are agonists and/or ligands of dopamine receptors and may be useful, inter alia, for the treatment of a condition responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation, for example, pain, inflammation, a neurological or neurodegenerative disorder, a cardiovascular disorder, an ocular disorder or an immune system disorder.

Description

HETEROARYL AMIDE ANALOGUES
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
This invention relates generally to heteroaryl amide analogues that have useful pharmacological properties. The invention further relates to the use of such compounds for treatig conditions related to P2X7 receptor activation, for identifying other agents that bind to P2X7 receptor, and as probes for the detection and localization of P2X7 receptors.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Pain perception, or nociception, is mediated by the peripheral terminals of a group of specialized sensory neurons, termed "nociceptors." A wide variety of physical and chemical stimuli induce activation of such neurons in mammals, leading to recognition of a potentially harmful stimulus. Inappropriate or excessive activation of nociceptors, however, can result in debilitating acute or chronic pain.
Neuropathic pain, which typically results from damage to the nervous system, involves pain signal transmission in the absence of stimulus, pain from a normally innocuous stimulus (allodynia) and increased pain from a normally painful stimulus
(hyperalgesia). In most instances, neuropathic pain is thought to occur because of sensitization in the peripheral and central nervous systems following initial damage to the peripheral system (e.g., via direct injury or systemic disease). Neuropathic pain is typically burning, shooting and unrelenting in its intensity and can sometimes be more debilitating than the initial injury or disease process that induced it.
Existing treatments for neuropathic pain are generally suboptimal. Opiates, such as morphine, are potent analgesics, but their usefulness is limited because of adverse side effects, such as physical addictiveness and withdrawal properties, as well as respiratory depression, mood changes, and decreased intestinal motility with concomitant constipation, nausea, vomiting, and alterations in the endocrine and autonomic nervous systems. In addition, neuropathic pain is frequently non- responsive or only partially responsive to conventional opioid analgesic regimens, or to treatment with other drugs, such as gabapentin. Treatments employing the N- methyl-D-aspartate antagonist ketamine or the alpha(2)-adrenergic agonist clonidine can reduce acute or chronic pain, and permit a reduction in opioid consumption, but these agents are often poorly tolerated due to side effects.
Another common condition for which existing therapies are insufficient or problematic is inflammation. Transient inflammation is a beneficial mechanism that protects mammals from invading pathogens. Uncontrolled inflammation, however, causes tissue damage and pain and is the underlying cause of many illnesses, including asthma, as well as other allergic, infectious, autoimmune, degenerative, and idiopathic diseases. Existing treatments often exhibit low, delayed or only temporary efficacy, undesirable side-effects and/or a lack of selectivity. There is a continuing need for new drugs that overcome one or more of the shortcomings of drugs currently used for immunosuppression or in the treatment or prevention of inflammatory disorders, including allergic disorders, autoimmune disorders, fibrogenic disorders, and neurodegenerative diseases, such as amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Alzheimer's disease, and Huntington's disease. The P2X7 receptor is a ligand-gated ion channel that is activated by ATP and is present on a variety of cell types, including microglia in the central nervous system and cells involved in inflammation and immune system function, such as immune cells. In particular, P2X7 is involved in activation of lymphocytes and monocyte/macrophages leading to the increased release of pro-inflammatory cytokines (e.g., TNFalpha and IL-I beta) from these cells. Recent studies indicate that inhibiting P2X7 receptor activation in situations of inflammation (e.g., rheumatoid arthritis and other autoimmune diseases, osteoarthritis, uveitis, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease and inflammatory bowel disease) or interstitial fibrosis results in a therapeutic effect. These and other studies indicate that P2X7 receptor antagonists may find use in the treatment and prophylaxis of pain, including acute, chronic and neuropathic pain, as well as a variety of other conditions including osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, arthro sclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, Alzheimer's disease, traumatic brain injury, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, and fibrosis of internal organs (e.g., interstitial fibrosis). Small molecule P2X7 receptor antagonists are desirable for such therapies.
The present invention fulfills this need, and provides further related advantages. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention provides heteroaryl amide analogues of Formula Ia or
Figure imgf000004_0001
U is CR1A or N;
W is -CC=O)NR4-, -NR4CC=O)- or -NR4-NR4-CC=O)-; each R4 is independently hydrogen, C!-C6alkyl, (C3-Cgcycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl or taken together with a substituent of X to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl;
X is absent or Ci-C6alkylene that is optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents selected from RB, RC, RD, and RE;
RB, RC, RD, and RE are each independently hydroxy, -COOH, Ci-C8alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl, Ci-C6aminoalkyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-CQ-
C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl and phenylC0-C2alkyl; or any two of RB, RC, RD, and RE taken together with the carbon atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; or any one of RB, RC, RD, and RE taken together with R4 and the atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 4- to
7-membered heterocycloalkyl;
Y is CrQalkyl, C3-C16cycloalkyl, 4- to 16-membered heterocycloalkyl, 6- to
16-membered aryl or 5- to 16-membered heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 to 6 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, COOH, Ci-C6alkyl, C2-
C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, d-C6haloalkyl, CrCόhydroxyalkyl, Ci-C6aminoalkyl, C1- C6alkoxy, C!-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-C6alkanoyl, Ci-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di^Ci-Cόalky^amino, d-Cealkanoylamino, mono- or di^CrQalky^aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(Cj-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl and
Figure imgf000005_0001
Z1, Z2, Z3, and Z4 are independently CR1 or N;
R1A is hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, COOH, Ci-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, Ci-C6haloalkyl, C]-C6hydroxyalkyl, Ci-Cόaminoalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, Ci-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-C6alkanoyl, Ci-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, CrC6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (CrCealkyljsulfonylamino; each R1 is independently hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, COOH, Ci-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, Ci-Qhaloalkyl, CrQhydroxyalkyl, Ci-C6aminoalkyl, d-C6alkoxy, C1- Qhaloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-C6aJkanoyl, Ci-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3- C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, Ci-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or
Figure imgf000005_0002
RA is a group of the formula -L-A-M, wherein: L is absent or CrCβalkylene that is optionally modified by (i) the replacement of a carbon-carbon single bond with a double or triple carbon-carbon bond, or (ii) substitution with oxo, -COOH, -SO3H, -SO2NH2, -PO3H2, tetrazole or oxadiazolone;
A is absent or CO, O, NR6, S, SO, SO2, CONR6, NR6CO, (C4- C7cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl; wherein R6 is hydrogen or Ci-C6alkyl; and
M is:
(i) hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, carboxyalkyl, or -COOH; or
(ii) Ci-C6haloalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, (4- to 10-membered carbocycle)C0-C4alkyl, (4- to 10-membered heterocycle)Co-C4alkyl, Q-Cealkanoyloxy, Q-Cealkanoylamino,
Ci-Cόalkylsulfonyl, Cj-C6alkylsulfonylamino, CrCδalkylsulfonyloxy, mono- or di- CrC6alkylamino, mono- or (Ii-(C1 -C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or (Ii-(C1 -C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; each of which is optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, alkoxycarbonyl, alkanoyloxy, Ci-Cόalkyl, Ci-Cehydroxyalkyl, d-Cehaloalkyl, CrC6alkoxy, d-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, Q-Cδalkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, Cj-C6alkylsulfonyl, Ci-Cealkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(Ci- C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle.
Within certain aspects, heteroaryl amide analogues of Formula Ia and/or Ib are P2X7 receptor antagonists with an IC50 value no greater than 20 micromolar, 10 micromolar, 5 micromolar, 1 micromolar, 500 nanomolar or 100 nanomolar in an in vitro assay for determination of P2X7 receptor antagonist activity. In certain embodiments, such P2X7 receptor antagonists exhibit no detectable agonist activity in an in vitro assay of P2X7 receptor activity (e.g., in an assay provided in Example 7, herein) at a concentration equal to the IC50, 10 times the IC50 or 100 times the IC50 and/or at a concentration of 2,500 nM.
Within certain aspects, heteroaryl amide analogues provided herein are labeled with a detectable marker (e.g., radiolabeled or fluorescein conjugated).
The present invention further provides, within other aspects, pharmaceutical compositions comprising at least one heteroaryl amide analogue provided herein in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
Within further aspects, methods are provided for modulating (e.g., reducing) cellular P2X7 receptor activation or activity, comprising contacting a cell (e.g., microglia, astrocyte or peripheral macrophage or monocyte) that expresses a P2X7 receptor with at least one P2X7 receptor modulator as described herein. Such contact may occur in vivo or in vitro and is generally performed using a concentration of P2X7 receptor modulator that is sufficient to detectably alter P2X7 receptor activity in vitro (as determined, for example, using an assay as described in Example 7).
The present invention further provides methods for treating a condition responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X7 receptor antagonist as described herein. Within other aspects, methods are provided for treating pain in a patient, comprising administering to a patient suffering from (or at risk for) pain a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X7 receptor antagonist as described herein. Within other aspects, methods are provided for treating inflammation in a patient, comprising administering to a patient suffering from (or at risk for) inflammation a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X7 receptor antagonist as described herein.
Methods are further provided for treating osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, arthrosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, Alzheimer's disease, traumatic brain injury, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, ocular conditions (e.g., glaucoma), cirrhosis, lupus, scleroderma, or fibrosis of internal organs (e.g., interstitial fibrosis) in a patient, comprising administering to a patient suffering from
(or at risk for) one or more of the foregoing conditions a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X^ receptor antagonist as described herein.
Within still further aspects, the present invention provides methods for inhibiting death of retinal ganglion cells in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one P2X7 receptor antagonist as described herein. Methods are further provided for identifying an agent that binds to P2X7 receptor, comprising: (a) contacting P2X7 receptor with a labeled compound that is a heteroaryl amide analogue as described herein under conditions that permit binding of the compound to P2X7 receptor, thereby generating bound, labeled compound; (b) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound, labeled compound in the absence of test agent; (c) contacting the bound, labeled compound with a test agent; (d) detecting a signal that corresponds to the amount of bound labeled compound in the presence of test agent; and (e) detecting a decrease in signal detected in step (d), as compared to the signal detected in step (b).
Within further aspects, the present invention provides methods for determining the presence or absence of P2X7 receptor in a sample, comprising: (a) contacting a sample with a compound as described herein under conditions that permit modulation by the compound of P2X7 receptor activity; and (b) detecting a signal indicative of a level of the compound modulating P2X7 receptor activity.
The present invention also provides packaged pharmaceutical preparations, comprising: (a) a pharmaceutical composition as described herein in a container; and (b) instructions for using the composition to (i) treat one or more conditions responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation, such as pain, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, arthrosclerosis, inflammatory bowel disease, Alzheimer's disease, traumatic brain injury, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, ocular conditions (e.g., glaucoma), cirrhosis, lupus, scleroderma, and/or fibrosis of internal organs (e.g., interstitial fibrosis) or (ii) provide retinal neuroprotection (e.g., inhibit death of retinal ganglion cells).
In yet another aspect, the present invention provides methods for preparing the compounds disclosed herein, including the intermediates.
These and other aspects of the invention will become apparent upon reference to the following detailed description.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF ILLUSTRATIVE EMBODIMENTS
TERMINOLOGY
Compounds are generally described herein using standard nomenclature. For compounds having asymmetric centers, it should be understood that (unless otherwise specified) all of the optical isomers and mixtures thereof are encompassed. In addition, compounds with carbon-carbon double bonds may occur in Z- and E- forms, with all isomeric forms of the compounds being included in the present invention unless otherwise specified. Where a compound exists in various tautomeric forms, a recited compound is not limited to any one specific tautomer, but rather is intended to encompass all tautomeric forms. Certain compounds are described herein using a general formula that includes variables (e.g., Rl, A, X). Unless otherwise specified, each variable within such a formula is defined independently of any other variable, and any variable that occurs more than one time in a formula is defined independently at each occurrence. The phrase "heteroaryl amide analogue," as used herein, encompasses all compounds of Formula Ia or Formula Ib, as well as compounds of other Formulas provided herein (including any enantiomers, racemates and stereoisomers, and including the various crystal forms and polymorphs) and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates (e.g., hydrates, including hydrates of salts), amides and esters of such compounds.
A "pharmaceutically acceptable salt" of a compound recited herein is an acid or base salt that is suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings or animals without excessive toxicity or carcinogenicity, and preferably without irritation, allergic response, or other problem or complication. Such salts include mineral and organic acid salts of basic residues such as amines, as well as alkali or organic salts of acidic residues such as carboxylic acids. Specific pharmaceutically acceptable anions for use in salt formation include, but are not limited to, acetate, 2- acetoxybenzoate, ascorbate, benzoate, bicarbonate, bromide, calcium edetate, carbonate, chloride, citrate, dihydrochloride, diphosphate, ditartrate, edetate, estolate (ethylsuccinate), formate, fumarate, gluceptate, gluconate, glutamate, glycolate, glycollylarsanilate, hexylresorcinate, hydrabamine, hydrobromide, hydrochloride, hydroiodide, hydroxymaleate, hydroxynaphthoate, iodide, isethionate, lactate, lactobionate, malate, maleate, mandelate, methylbromide, methylnitrate, methylsulfate, mucate, napsylate, nitrate, pamoate, pantothenate, phenylacetate, phosphate, polygalacturonate, propionate, salicylate, stearate, subacetate, succinate, sulfamate, sulfanilate, sulfate, sulfonates including besylate (benzenesulfonate), camsylate (camphorsulfonate), edisylate (ethane- 1,2-disulfonate), esylate (ethanesulfonate) 2-hydroxyethylsulfonate, mesylate (methanesulfonate), triflate (trifluoromethanesulfonate) and tosylate (p-toluenesulfonate), tannate, tartrate, teoclate and triethiodide. Similarly, pharmaceutically acceptable cations for use in salt formation include, but are not limited to ammonium, benzathine, chloroprocaine, choline, diethanolamine, ethylenediamine, meglumine, procaine, and metals such as aluminum, calcium, lithium, magnesium, potassium, sodium and zinc. Those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize further pharmaceutically acceptable salts for the compounds provided herein. In general, a pharmaceutically acceptable acid or base salt can be synthesized from a parent compound that contains a basic or acidic moiety by any conventional chemical method. Briefly, such salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or base forms of these compounds with a stoichiometric amount of the appropriate base or acid in water or in an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two; generally, the use of nonaqueous media, such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, methanol, isopropanol or acetonitrile, is preferred.
It will be apparent that each compound provided herein may, but need not, be formulated as a solvate (e.g., hydrate) or non-covalent complex. In addition, the various crystal forms and polymorphs are within the scope of the present invention. Also provided herein are prodrugs of the compounds of the recited Formulas. A "prodrug" is a compound that may not fully satisfy the structural requirements of the compounds provided herein, but is modified in vivo, following administration to a patient, to produce a compound of a formula provided herein. For example, a prodrug may be an acylated derivative of such a compound. Prodrugs include compounds wherein hydroxy, amine or sulfhydryl groups are bonded to any group that, when administered to a mammalian subject, cleaves to form a free hydroxy, amino or sulfhydryl group, respectively. Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to, acetate, formate, benzoate and peptide derivatives of alcohol and amine functional groups within a compound provided herein. Prodrugs may generally be prepared by modifying functional groups present in the compounds in such a way that the modifications are cleaved in vivo to yield the parent compounds.
As used herein, the term "alkyl" refers to a straight or branched chain saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon. Alkyl groups include groups having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms (Cl-C8alkyl), from 1 to 6 carbon atoms (Cl-C6alkyl) and from 1 to 4 carbon atoms (Cl-C4alkyl), such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, sec-butyl, tert-butyl, pentyl, 2-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl, hexyl, 2-hexyl, 3-hexyl and 3-methylpentyl. "CO-Cnalkyl" refers to a single covalent bond (CO) or an alkyl group having from 1 to n carbon atoms; for example "C0-C4alkyl" refers to a single covalent bond or a Cl- C4alkyl group. In some instances, a substituent of an alkyl group is specifically indicated. For example, "Cl-C6hydroxyalkyl" is a Cl-C6alkyl group substituted with at least one -OH; "Cl-Cόaminoalkyl" is a Cl-C6alkyl group substituted with at least one — NH2; Cl-C6cyanoalkyl is a Cl-C6alkyl group substituted with at least one -CN.
"Alkenyl" refers to straight or branched chain alkene groups, which comprise at least one unsaturated carbon-carbon double bond. Alkenyl groups include C2-
C8alkenyl, C2-C6alkenyl and C2-C4alkenyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or
2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively, such as ethenyl, allyl or isopropenyl. "C2-
Cόcyanoalkenyl" is a C2-C6alkenyl group substituted with at least one -CN. "Alkynyl" refers to straight or branched chain alkyne groups, which have one or more unsaturated carbon-carbon bonds, at least one of which is a triple bond. Alkynyl groups include C2-C8alkynyl, C2-C6alkynyl and C2-C4alkynyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, 2 to 6 or 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. "Alkylene" refers to a divalent alkyl group, as defined above. Cl-C2alkylene is methylene or ethylene; C0-C4alkylene is a single covalent bond or an alkylene group having 1, 2, 3 or carbon atoms; C0-C2alkylene is a single covalent bond, methylene or ethylene. A "Cl-C6alkylene that is optionally modified by the replacement of a carbon-carbon single bond with a double or triple carbon-carbon bond" is a Cl-C6alkylene group as described above, or a divalent C2-C6alkene or C2- Cόalkyne.
A "cycloalkyl" is a group that comprises one or more saturated and/or partially saturated rings in which all ring members are carbon, such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, adamantyl, myrtanyl and partially saturated variants of the foregoing, such as cyclohexenyl. Cycloalkyl groups do not comprise an aromatic ring or a heterocyclic ring. Certain cycloalkyl groups are C3- C7cycloalkyl, in which the cycloalkyl group contains a single ring having from 3 to 7 ring members, all of which are carbon. A "(C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl" is a C3- C7cycloalkyl group linked via a single covalent bond or a Cl-C4alkylene group. A "(C4-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkylene" is a divalent (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-
C4alkyl group that is linked via two single covalent bonds to two specified moieties. In general, one single covalent bond is located on the cyclic portion and the other is located on the alkylene portion, if present; alternatively, if no alkylene group is present, both single covalent bonds are on different ring members. For example, with respect to the group RA, if A is (C6cycloalkyl)C2alkylene and M is COOH, one RA moiety so formed is:
Figure imgf000011_0001
By "alkoxy," as used herein, is meant an alkyl group as described above attached via an oxygen bridge. Alkoxy groups include C!-C6alkoxy and Q-Qalkoxy groups, which have from 1 to 6 or from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. Methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, sec-butoxy, tert-butoxy, n-pentoxy, 2- pentoxy, 3-pentoxy, isopentoxy, neopentoxy, hexoxy, 2-hexoxy, 3-hexoxy, and 3- methylpentoxy are representative alkoxy groups.
The term "oxo" is used herein to refer to an oxygen substituent of a carbon atom that results in the formation of a carbonyl group (C=O). An oxo group that is a substituent of a nonaromatic carbon atom results in a conversion of -CH2- to — C(=O)— .
An oxo group that is a substituent of an aromatic carbon atom results in a conversion of
-CH- to -C(=O)- and may result in a loss of aromaticity.
The term "alkanoyl" refers to an acyl group (e.g., -(C=O)-alkyl), in which carbon atoms are in a linear or branched alkyl arrangement and where attachment is through the carbon of the keto group. Alkanoyl groups have the indicated number of carbon atoms, with the carbon of the keto group being included in the numbered carbon atoms. For example a C2alkanoyl group is -(C=O)CH3. Alkanoyl groups include, for example, C2-Cgalkanoyl, C2-C6alkanoyl and C2-C4alkanoyl groups, which have from 2 to 8, from 2 to 6 or from 2 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. "Qalkanoyl" refers to -(C=O)H, which (along with C2-C8alkanoyl) is encompassed by the term "Cj-Qalkanoyl."
"Alkyl ether" refers to a linear or branched ether substituent (i.e., an alkyl group that is substituted with an alkoxy group). Alkyl ether groups include C2- C8alkyl ether, C2-C6alkyl ether and C2-C4alkyl ether groups, which have 2 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively. A C2 alkyl ether substituent is -CH2-O-CH3.
The term "alkoxycarbonyl" refers to an alkoxy group attached through a keto (-(C=O)-) bridge (i.e., a group having the general structure -C(=O)-O-alkyl). Alkoxycarbonyl groups include C1-C8, C1-C6 and C1-C4alkoxycarbonyl groups, which have from 1 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively, in the alkyl portion of the group (i.e., the carbon of the keto bridge is not included in the indicated number of carbon atoms). "Ctalkoxycarbonyl" refers to -C(=O)-O-CH3; C3alkoxycarbonyl indicates - C(=O)-O-(CH2)2CH3 or -C(=OHMCH)(CH3)2.
"Alkanoyloxy," as used herein, refers to an alkanoyl group linked via an oxygen bridge (i.e., a group having the general structure — O-C(=O)-alkyl). Alkanoyloxy groups include C1-C8, C1-C6 and C1-C4alkanoyloxy groups, which have from 1 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms, respectively, in the alkyl portion of the group. For example, "Cialkanoyloxy" refers to -O-C(=O)-CH3. Similarly, "alkanoylamino," as used herein, refers to an alkanoyl group linked via a nitrogen bridge (i.e., a group having the general structure -N(R)-C(=O)-alkyl), in which R is hydrogen or CrCβalkyl. Alkanoylamino groups include C1-Cg, Cj-C6 and C1-C4alkanoylamino groups, which have from 1 to 8, 6 or 4 carbon atoms within the alkanoyl group, respectively, in the alkyl portion of the group.
"Alkylsulfonyl" refers to groups of the formula -(SO2)-alkyl, in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment. Alkylsulfonyl groups include C1- C6alkylsulfonyl and Ci-C4alkylsulfonyl groups, which have from 1 to 6 or from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. Methylsulfonyl is one representative alkylsulfonyl group. "C1-C4haloalkylsulfonyl" is an alkylsulfonyl group that has from 1 to 4 carbon atoms and is substituted with at least one halogen (e.g., trifluoromethylsulfonyl).
"Alkylsulfonylamino" refers to groups of the formula -N(R)-(SO2)-alkyl, in which R is hydrogen or Cj-Cδalkyl and the nitrogen atom is the point of attachment. Alkylsulfonylamino groups include CrCόalkylsulfonylamino and C1- C4alkylsulfonylamino groups, which have from 1 to 6 or 1 to 4 carbon atoms, respectively. Methylsulfonylamino is a representative alkylsulfonylamino group. "C1- C6haloalkylsulfonylamino" is an alkylsulfonylamino group that has from 1 to 6 carbon atoms and is substituted with at least one halogen (e.g., trifluoromethylsulfonylamino) . "Aminosulfonyl" refers to groups of the formula -(SO2)-NH2, in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment. The term "mono- or di-(Ci- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl" refers to groups that satisfy the formula -(SO2)-NR2, in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment, and in which one R is Ci-Cβalkyl and the other R is hydrogen or an independently chosen Q-Cδalkyl. "Alkylaminoalkyl" refers to an alkylamino group linked via an alkylene group
(i.e., a group having the general structure -alkylene-NH-alkyl or -alkylene- N(alkyl)(alkyl)) in which each alkyl is selected independently from alkyl, cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups. Alkylaminoalkyl groups include, for example, mono- and di-(C1-C8alkyl)aminoC1-Cgalkyl, mono- and di-(C]-C6alkyl)aminoCi-C6alkyl and mono- and di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminoC1-C4alkyl. "Mono- or di-(CrC6alkyl)aminoCo- C6alkyl" refers to a mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino group linked via a single covalent bond or a Ci-C6alkylene group. The following are representative alkylaminoalkyl groups:
Figure imgf000014_0001
It will be apparent that the definition of "alkyl" as used in the terms
"alkylamino" and "alkylaminoalkyl" differs from the definition of "alkyl" used for all other alkyl-containing groups, in the inclusion of cycloalkyl and (cycloalkyl)alkyl groups (e.g., (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C6alkyl).
The term "aminocarbonyl" refers to an amide group (i.e., -(C=O)NH2). "Mono- or di^CrCealky^aminocarbonyl" refers to groups of the formula -(C=O)- N(R)2, in which the carbonyl is the point of attachment, one R is C^Coalkyl and the other R is hydrogen or an independently chosen Ci-C6alkyl.
"Mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonylC0-C4alkyl" is an aminocarbonyl group in which one or both of the hydrogen atoms is replaced with Ci-Qalkyl, and which is linked via a single covalent bond (i.e., mono- or (Ii-(C1- C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl) or a C!-C4alkylene group (i.e., -(C0-C4alkyl)-(C=O)N(C1- C6alkyl)2). If both hydrogen atoms are so replaced, the Q-Qalkyl groups may be the same or different.
The term " amino sulfonyl" refers to a sulfonamide group (i.e., -(SO2)NH2). "Mono- or di-(C1-C8alkyl)aminosulfonyl" refers to groups of the formula -(SO2)- N(R)2, in which the sulfur atom is the point of attachment, one R is Q-Csalkyl and the other R is hydrogen or an independently chosen Ci-Cgalkyl.
"Mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonylCo-C4alkyl" is an aminosulfonyl group in which one or both of the hydrogen atoms is replaced with C1-QaIkVl, and which is linked via a single covalent bond (i.e., mono- or di-(C1- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl) or a Cj-C4alkylene group (i.e., -(C1-C4alkyl)-(SO2)N(C1- C6alkyl)2). If both hydrogen atoms are so replaced, the C!-C6alkyl groups may be the same or different. The term "halogen" refers to fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
A "haloalkyl" is an alkyl group that is substituted with 1 or more independently chosen halogens (e.g., "Ci-Cόhaloalkyl" groups have from 1 to 6 carbon atoms). Examples of haloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, mono-, di- or tri-fluoromethyl; mono-, di- or tri-chloromethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta- fluoroethyl; mono-, di-, tri-, tetra- or penta-chloroethyl; and 1,2,2,2-tetrafluoro-l- trifluoromethyl-ethyl. Typical haloalkyl groups are trifluoromethyl and difluoromethyl. The term "haloalkoxy" refers to a haloalkyl group as defined above that is linked via an oxygen bridge. A dash ("-") that is not between two letters or symbols is used to indicate a point of attachment for a substituent. For example, -CONH2 is attached through the carbon atom.
A "carbocycle" or "carbocyclic group" comprises at least one ring formed entirely by carbon-carbon bonds (referred to herein as a carbocyclic ring), and does not contain a heterocycle. Unless otherwise specified, each ring within a carbocycle may be independently saturated, partially saturated or aromatic, and is optionally substituted as indicated. A carbocycle generally has from 1 to 3 fused, pendant or spiro rings and optionally further contains one or more alkylene bridges; carbocycles within certain embodiments have one ring or two fused rings. Typically, each ring contains from 3 to 8 ring members (i.e., C3-C8); C5-C7 rings are recited in certain embodiments. Carbocycles comprising fused, pendant or spiro rings typically contain from 9 to 16 ring members. Certain representative carbocycles are cycloalkyl as described above (e.g., cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl or adamantly). Other carbocycles are aryl (i.e., contain at least one aromatic carbocyclic ring, with or without one or more additional aromatic and/or cycloalkyl rings). Such aryl carbocycles include, for example, phenyl, naphthyl (e.g., 1-naphthyl and 2-naphthyl), fluorenyl, indanyl and 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthyl. The term "haloaryl" refers to an aryl group that is substituted with at least one halogen.
Certain carbocycles recited herein are Ce-CioarylCo-Csalkyl groups (i.e., groups in which a 6- to 10-membered carbocyclic group comprising at least one aromatic ring is linked via a single covalent bond or a CrCgalkylene group). Phenyl groups linked via a single covalent bond or Q-Caalkylene group are designated phenylCo-C2alkyl (e.g., benzyl, 1-phenyl-ethyl and 2-phenyl-ethyl).
A "heterocycle" or "heterocyclic group" has from 1 to 3 fused, pendant or spiro rings, at least one of which is a heterocyclic ring (i.e., one or more ring atoms is a heteroatom independently chosen from O, S and N, with the remaining ring atoms being carbon). Additional rings, if present, may be heterocyclic or carbocyclic. Typically, a heterocyclic ring comprises 1, 2, 3 or 4 heteroatoms; within certain embodiments each heterocyclic ring has 1 or 2 heteroatoms per ring. Each heterocyclic ring generally contains from 3 to 8 ring members (rings having from 4 or 5 to 7 ring members are recited in certain embodiments) and heterocycles comprising fused, pendant or spiro rings typically contain from 9 to 14 ring members. Certain heterocycles comprise a sulfur atom as a ring member; in certain embodiments, the sulfur atom is oxidized to SO or SO2. Unless otherwise specified, a heterocycle may be a heterocycloalkyl group (i.e., each ring is saturated or partially saturated), such as a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl, which generally comprises 1, 2, 3 or 4 ring atoms that are independently chosen from C, O, N and S; or a heteroaryl group (i.e., at least one ring within the group is aromatic), such as a 5- to 10-membered heteroaryl (which may be monocyclic or bicyclic) or a 6-membered heteroaryl (e.g., pyridyl or pyrimidyl). N-linked heterocyclic groups are linked via a component nitrogen atom. As used herein, "aralkyl" refers to a moiety composed of an alkyl radical bearing an aryl substituent, wherein the aralkyl moiety has from about 7 to about 50 carbon atoms (and all combinations and subcombinations of ranges and specific numbers of carbon atoms therein), and where aryl and alkyl are as previously defined with from about 7 to about 11 carbon atoms being preferred. Non-limiting examples include, for example, benzyl, diphenylmethyl, triphenylmethyl, alpha- or beta- phenylethyl, and diphenylethyl.
As used herein, "heteroaralkyl" refers to a ring system composed of a heteroaryl substituted alkyl radical where heteroaryl and alkyl are as previously defined, and where the heteroaralkyl group has from about 7 to about 50 carbon atoms (and all combinations and subcombinations of ranges and specific numbers of carbon atoms therein),. Non-limiting examples include, for example, 2-(lH-pyrrol-3- yl)ethyl, 3-pyridylmethyl, 5-(2H-tetrazolyl)methyl, and 3-(pyrimidin-2-yl)-2- methylcyclopentanyl. A "heterocycleCo-C4alkyl" is a heterocyclic group linked via a single covalent bond or Q-Qalkylene group. A "(4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C1-C4alkyl" is a heterocycloalkyl ring with from 4 to 7 ring members that is linked via a C1- C4alkylene group. A "(4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C4alkylene" is a divalent (4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl group that is linked via two single covalent bonds to two specified moieties. In general, one such single covalent bond is located on the cyclic portion and the other is located on the alkylene portion, if present; alternatively, if no alkylene group is present, both such single covalent bonds are located on different ring members. For example, with respect to the group RA, if A is a (piperidinyl)C2alkylene and M is COOH, one RA moiety so formed is:
Figure imgf000017_0001
A "substituent," as used herein, refers to a molecular moiety that is covalently bonded to an atom within a molecule of interest. For example, a ring substituent may be a moiety such as a halogen, alkyl group, haloalkyl group or other group that is covalently bonded to an atom (preferably a carbon or nitrogen atom) that is a ring member. Substituents of aromatic groups are generally covalently bonded to a ring carbon atom. The term "substitution" refers to replacing a hydrogen atom in a molecular structure with a substituent, such that the valence on the designated atom is not exceeded, and such that a chemically stable compound (i.e., a compound that can be isolated, characterized, and tested for biological activity) results from the substitution.
Groups that are "optionally substituted" are unsubstituted or are substituted by other than hydrogen at one or more available positions, typically 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 positions, by one or more suitable groups (which may be the same or different). Optional substitution is also indicated by the phrase "substituted with from 0 to X substituents," where X is the maximum number of possible substituents. Certain optionally substituted groups are substituted with from 0 to 2, 3 or 4 independently selected substituents (i.e., are unsubstituted or substituted with up to the recited maximum number of substituents). Other optionally substituted groups are substituted with at least one substituent (e.g., substituted with from 1 to 2, 3 or 4 independently selected substituents).
The term "P2X7 receptor" refers to any P2X7 receptor, preferably a mammalian receptor such as the human or rat P2X7 receptor disclosed in US Patent No. 6,133,434, as well as homologues thereof found in other species.
A "P2X7 receptor modulator," also referred to herein as a "modulator," is a compound that increases or decreases P2X7 receptor activation and/or P2X7 receptor- mediated activity (e.g., signal transduction). P2X7 receptor modulators specifically provided herein are compounds of Formula I and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates and esters thereof. A modulator may be a P2X7 receptor agonist or antagonist.
A modulator is considered an "antagonist" if it detectably inhibits P2X7 receptor-mediated signal transduction (using, for example, a representative assay provided in Example 7); in general, such an antagonist inhibits P2X7 receptor activation with a IC50 value of less than 20 micromolar, preferably less than 10 micromolar, more preferably less than 5 micromolar, more preferably less than 1 micromolar, still more preferably less than 500 nanomolar, and most preferably less than 100 nanomolar within an assay provided in Example 7. P2X7 receptor antagonists include neutral antagonists and inverse agonists. An "inverse agonist" of P2X7 receptor is a compound that reduces the activity of P2X7 receptor below its basal activity level in the absence of added ligand. Inverse agonists of P2X7 receptor may also inhibit the activity of ligand at P2X7 receptor and/or binding of ligand to P2X7 receptor. The basal activity of P2X7 receptor, as well as a reduction in P2X7 receptor activity due to the presence of P2X7 receptor antagonist, may be determined from a calcium mobilization assay (e.g., the assay of Example 7).
A "neutral antagonist" of P2X7 receptor is a compound that inhibits the activity of ligand at P2X7 receptor, but does not significantly change the basal activity of the receptor (i.e., within a calcium mobilization assay as described in Example 7 performed in the absence of ligand, P2X7 receptor activity is reduced by no more than
10%, preferably by no more than 5%, and more preferably by no more than 2%; most preferably, there is no detectable reduction in activity). Neutral antagonists of P2X7 receptor may inhibit the binding of ligand to P2X7 receptor.
As used herein a "P2X7 receptor agonist" is a compound that elevates the activity of the P2X7 receptor above the basal activity level of the receptor (i.e., enhances P2X7 receptor activation and/or P2X7 receptor-mediated activity, such as signal transduction). P2X7 receptor agonist activity may be detected using the representative assay provided in Example 7. P2X7 receptor agonists include ATP and 2'(3')-O-(4-benzoyl-benzoyl)adenosine 5'-triphosephate (BzATP).
A "therapeutically effective amount" (or dose) is an amount that, upon administration to a patient, results in a discernible patient benefit (e.g., provides detectable relief from at least one condition being treated). Such relief may be detected using any appropriate criteria, including alleviation of one or more symptoms such as pain. A therapeutically effective amount or dose generally results in a concentration of compound in a body fluid (such as blood, plasma, serum, CSF, synovial fluid, lymph, cellular interstitial fluid, tears or urine) that is sufficient to alter
P2X7 receptor-mediated signal transduction (using an assay provided in Example 7).
It will be apparent that the discernible patient benefit may be apparent after administration of a single dose, or may become apparent following repeated administration of the therapeutically effective dose according to a predetermined regimen, depending upon the indication for which the compound is administered.
By "statistically significant," as used herein, is meant results varying from control at the p<0.1 level of significance as measured using a standard parametric assay of statistical significance such as a student's T test.
A "patient" is any individual treated with a compound provided herein. Patients include humans, as well as other animals such as companion animals (e.g., dogs and cats) and livestock. Patients may be experiencing one or more symptoms of a condition responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation or may be free of such symptom(s) (i.e., treatment may be prophylactic in a patient considered at risk for the development of such symptoms). HETEROARYL AMIDE ANALOGUES As noted above, the present invention provides heteroaryl amide analogues. In certain embodiments, the present invention provides heteroaryl amide analogues of Formula Ia and/or Ib:
Figure imgf000020_0001
U is CRiA or N;
W is -CC=O)NR4-, -NR4CC=O)- or -NR4-NR4-CC=O)-; each R4 is independently hydrogen, Ci-Cβalkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl or taken together with a substituent of X to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl;
X is absent or Ci-C6alkylene that is optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents selected from RB, RC? RD, and RE;
RB, RC, RD, and RE are each independently hydroxy, -COOH, CrCgalkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, CrC6aminoalkyl, C2-Csalkyl ether, mono- or di-(Ci-
C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl and phenylCo-C2alkyl; or any two of RB, RC, RD, and RE taken together with the carbon atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; or any one of RB, RC, RD, and RE taken together with R4 and the atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 4- to
7-membered heterocycloalkyl;
Y is Ci-C8alkyl, C3-Ci6cycloalkyl, 4- to 16-membered heterocycloalkyl, 6- to 16-membered aryl or 5- to 16-membered heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 to 6 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, COOH, Ci-C6alkyl, C2- Cδalkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, CrCόhaloalkyl, Ci-C6hydroxyalkyl, Ci-C6aminoalkyl, C1- C6alkoxy, Ci-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, CrC6alkanoyl, CrCisalkylsulfonyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl, mono- or
Figure imgf000021_0001
Ci-Qalkanoylamino, mono- or (Ii-(C1 -C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di^CrCealky^aminosulfonyl and (C i -C6alkyl)sulfonylamino ;
Z1, Z2, Z3, and Z4 are independently CR1 or N; R1A is hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, COOH, CrC6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, CrC6haloalkyl, CrCόhydroxyalkyl, Ci-Qaminoalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, Ci-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, Q-Cδalkanoyl, C!-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, CrCδalkanoylamino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (Q-Coalky^sulfonylamino; each R1 is independently hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, COOH, CrC6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, C!-C6haloalkyl, CrCδhydroxyalkyl, Q-Ceaminoalkyl, Ci-Cβalkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, CrQalkanoyl, Ci-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3- C7cycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, Ci-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or
Figure imgf000021_0002
and RA is a group of the formula -L-A-M, wherein:
L is absent or CrQalkylene that is optionally modified by (i) the replacement of a carbon-carbon single bond with a double or triple carbon-carbon bond, or (ii) substitution with oxo, -COOH, -SO3H, -SO2NH2, -PO3H2, tetrazole or oxadiazolone;
A is absent or CO, O, NR6, S, SO, SO2, CONR6, NR6CO, (C4- C7cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl; wherein R6 is hydrogen or Ci-Cόalkyl; and
M is: (i) hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, carboxyalkyl, or -COOH; or
(ii) C!-C6haloalkyl, d-C6alkoxy, (4- to 10-membered carbocycle)Co-C4alkyl,
(4- to 10-membered heterocycle)Co-C4alkyl, Cj-C6alkanoyloxy, Q-Cόalkanoylamino,
CrQalkylsulfonyl, CrCoalkylsulfonylamino, Ci-Qalkylsulfonyloxy, mono- or di- Ci-Cealkylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; each of which is optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, alkoxycarbonyl, alkanoyloxy, Q-Cealkyl, Ci-C6hydroxyalkyl, CrC6haloalkyl, CrC6alkoxy, d-Qhaloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-Cδalkanoylamino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino, Ci-Cealkylsulfonyl, Q-Cόalkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(Q- C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle.
In certain embodiments, compounds or salts or hydrates of formula Ia and/or Ib are provided such that
(a) when U is N, W is -C(=O)NH-, and L and A are absent, then M is other than thienyl or unsubstituted or halogen-substituted 4- to 10-membered carbocycle;
(b) when U is N, W is - NHC(=O)— , and A is absent, then M is other than thienyl or unsubstituted or halogen-substituted 4- to 10-membered carbocycle;
(c) when U is CH , then W-X-Y is other than:
Figure imgf000022_0001
wherein Rx is H or C(=O)-O-alkyl;
(d) when one OfZ1, Z2, Z3, and Z4 is N, and the others of Z1, Z2, Z3, and Z4 are each CH, RA and Y are each independently alkyl, aryl aralkyl or heteroaryl, W is - C(=0)N(H)-, and U is CR1A, then R1A is other than OH;
(e) when Z1, Z2, Z3,and Z4 are each CH, RA is unsubstituted phenyl, W is - C(=0)N(H)-, X is unsubstituted alkylene or alkylene substituted with one hydroxyl, Y is dialkylamino, unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl substituted with one alkyl, and U is CR1A, then RJA is other than halogen; and
(f) when Z1, Z2, Z3, and Z4 are each CR1, at least two of R1 are H and the remaining R1 are each independently H, halogen, nitro, hydroxy, or alkoxy, RA is cycloalkyl or substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, W is -C(=0)N(H)-, X is unsubstituted alkylene, Y is alkyl or cycloalkyl each optionally substituted with one COOH, dialkylamino, unsubstituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl substituted with nitrile or amino, and U is CR1A, then R1A is other than alkyl.
Within certain aspects, such compounds may be used in vitro or in vivo, as modulators of P2X7 receptors that may be used in a variety of contexts, including in the treatment of conditions responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation, such as pain.
Such modulators are also useful as probes for detection and localization of P2X7 receptor and as standards in P2X7 receptor-mediated signal transduction assays.
In certain embodiments, such compounds exhibit no detectable agonist activity an in vitro assay of P2X7 receptor agonism. In certain other embodiments, such compounds are capable of exhibiting an
IC50 value of 20 micromolar or less in an assay for P2X7 receptor antagonism.
In some embodiments, the compounds of the present invention or salts or hydrates thereof are compounds of formula Ia.
In other embodiments, the compounds of the present invention or salts or hydrates thereof are compounds of formula Ib.
In certain embodiments of the present invention, the compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib are provided as a salt or hydrate thereof.
Within Formula Ia and/or Ib, the heteroaryl core
Figure imgf000023_0001
comprises at least one nitrogen atom, as indicated, and optionally comprises additional nitrogen atom(s) at one or more of U, V, Zi, Z2, Z3, and/or Z4. In certain embodiments, U is CR1A; in further embodiments, U is CH. Within other embodiments, Z1, Z2 and Z3 are each CR1.
In some other embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, X is substituted.
In other embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, RB, RC, RD, and RE are each independently -COOH, CrCgalkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, C1- Cόaminoalkyl, C2-C8alkyl ether, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminoC0-C4alkyl, (4- to 7- membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl and phenylC0-C2alkyl; or any two of RB, RC, RD, and RE taken together with the carbon atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; or any one of RB, RC, RD5 and RE taken together with R4 and the atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl
In certain further embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, RB, RC, RD, and RE are each independently C1-C4alkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, or phenylCo-C2alkyl; In further aspects of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, any two of RB, RC,
RD, and RE taken together with the carbon atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
In certain aspects compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, any one of RB, RC, RD, and RE taken together with R4 and the atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
In some embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, U is CR1A (e.g., CH).
In other embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, U is N. In certain embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, Y is C1-
C8alkyl, C3-C16cycloalkyl, 6- to 16-membered aryl or (5- to 16-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted, preferably Cj-C8alkyl, 6- to 16-membered aryl or (5- to 16-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted.
In other embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, Y is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents. In further embodiments, Y is optionally substituted with 1 or 2 substituents.
In still other embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, Z1, Z2, Z3, and Z4 are independently CH. In other aspects, Z4 is N. In further aspects, at least one Of Z1, Z2, Z3, and Z4 is CR1. In certain further aspects, Z1 or Z4 is CRj; or Z1 is CR1. In certain embodiments of Formula Ia and/or Ib, R1 is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, aminocarbonyl, or Ci-Cόhaloalkyl. In certain aspects where R1 is halogen, said halogen is fluoro, chloro, or bromo; said halogen is fluoro. In certain further aspects
R1 is Ci-C3haloalkyl; in still other aspects R1 is Cjhaloalkyl; in yet other aspects, said Cjhaloalkyl is trifluoromethyl. Alternatively, each R1 is H.
In certain other embodiments of Formula Ia and/or Ib, preferably of Formula Ia, R1A is hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, COOH, Q-Qalkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, CrC6haloalkyl, Ci-Qhydroxyalkyl, Ci-C6aminoalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, CrCόhaloalkoxy, C2-Cδalkyl ether, Q-Qalkanoyl, C!-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-Cd-Cealky^amino, Q- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(Ci- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or
Figure imgf000025_0001
preferably hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, COOH, Ci-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2- C6alkynyl, Ci-Cόhaloalkyl, Ci-C6hydroxyalkyl, Ci-C6aminoalkyl, d-Cόalkoxy, C1- C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, d-Cealkanoyl, Ci-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3- C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, d-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (CrCδalky^sulfonylamino; more preferably hydrogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, COOH, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, Ci-C6haloalkyl, Ci-Cδhydroxyalkyl, CrCeaminoalkyl, d-Cβalkoxy, Ci-Cδhaloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, Cj-C6alkanoyl, d-Cδalkylsulfonyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, Ci-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (d-Cδalky^sulfonylamino.
In some embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, W is — NR4Q=O)- or -NR4-NR4-CC=O)-. In other aspects, W is -CC=O)NR4-.
In other embodiments, R4 is H.
In certain embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, M is:
(i) hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or -COOH; or (ii) CrQhaloalkyl, d-C6alkoxy, (4- to 10-membered aryl)C0-C4alkyl, (4- to
10-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl, d-Cβalkanoyloxy, Q-Cealkanoylamino, d-Cδalkylsulfonyl, d-Cόalkylsulfonylamino, CrC6alkylsulfonyloxy, mono- or di-Ci-Cδalkylamino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or
Figure imgf000026_0001
each of which is optionally substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, CrC6alkyl, Ci-Cδhydroxyalkyl, C1- C6haloalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, Ci-Cόhaloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, Q-Cόalkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, CrCόalkylsulfonyl, Ci-Cealkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle.
In certain other embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, M is: (i) hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or
-COOH; or
(ii) Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, Q-C6alkoxy, (4- to 10-membered aryl)C0-C4alkyl, (4- to 10-membered heterocyclocloakyl)Co-C4alkyl, CrQalkanoyloxy,
Ci-Cealkanoylamino, Q-Cealkylsulfonyl, CrCόalkylsulfonylamino, Ci-C6alkylsulfonyloxy, mono- or di-Ci-Cealkylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; each of which is optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, Ci-Qalkyl, Ci-Qhydroxyalkyl, Ci-C6haloalkyl, CrQalkoxy, Q-Cόhaloalkoxy, C2- C6alkyl ether, Ci-Cealkanoylamino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)amino, CrCealkylsulfonyl, C!-C6alkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7- membered heterocycle.
In still other embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, M is arylCj- C4alkyl or heteroarylC1-C4alkyl. In some such compounds, M is substituted; in others, it is unsubstituted.
In yet other embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, M is:
(i) hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or -COOH; or (ii) Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, d-C6alkoxy, (4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl, Ci-C6alkanoyloxy, CrCόalkanoylamino,
Q-Cβalkylsulfonyl, Ci-C6alkylsulfonylamino, CrCβalkylsulfonyloxy, mono- or di- Ci-Cealkylamino, mono- or di^CrCealkytyaminosulfonyl, or mono- or (Ii-(C1 -C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; each of which is optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, CrC6alkyl, Ci-C6hydroxyalkyl, Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, Ci-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether,
Ci-Cόalkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, Ci-Cβalkylsulfonyl, Ci-Cδalkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(Ci- C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle.
In certain embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, M is optionally substituted with one or two substituents. In certain aspects these substituents are independently chosen from halogen, Ct-Cβalkyl, C!-C6haloalkyl, and Ci-Cόalkoxy.
In some embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, RA is other than halophenyl, other than haloaryl, other than cycloalkyl, and/or other than thienyl. In certain embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, when RA is optionally substuted heteroaryl, said heteroaryl has at least one oxygen or nitrogen ring atom, preferably at least one nitrogen ring atom, and more preferably at least two nitrogen ring atoms.
In some other embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, RA is other than carbocyclic.
In still other embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, W-X-Y is optionally substituted -C(=O)N(H)RV. Alternatively, in some embodiments, W-X-Y is other than unsubstituted -C(=O)N(H)heteroaralkyl; or W-X-Y is other than unsubstituted -C(=O)N(H)heterocyclic; or W-X-Y is other than unsubstituted - C(=O)N(H)alkoxyalkyl; or W-X-Y is other than unsubstituted -C(=O)N(H)aralkyl.
In some embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, Rv is arylQ- C4alkyl or heteroarylC1-C4alkyl. In some aspects, Ry is substituted; in others, it is unsubstituted. Alternatively, in some embodiments, Rv is other than aminoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, or dialkylaminoalkyl, alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl. In certain embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, W is-
C(K))N(H)-. In other embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, M is optionally substituted heteroaryl; preferably said heteroaryl contains at least one nitrogen ring atom, more preferably said heteroaryl contains at least two nitrogen ring atoms. In certain embodiments M is optionally substituted pyrimidinyl, preferably optionally substituted pyrimidin-2-yl.
In some embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, X is Ci-C2alkylene, optionally substituted, preferably substituted with Ci-C4alkyl. In other embodiments, X is substituted with at least 2 substituents selected from RB, RC, RD, and RE, wherein any two of RB, Rc, RD, and RE taken together with the carbon atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl. Alternatively in some embodiments, X is substituted with at least 2 substituents selected from RB, RC, RD, and RE, wherein any two of RB, RC, RD, and RE taken together with the carbon atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl, preferably a 5- to 6-membered cycloalkyl. In certain embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, Y is optionally substituted carbocycle or heterocycle, preferably adamantyl, phenyl, pyridyl, or morpholinyl, each optionally substituted.
In certain other embodiments of compounds of Formula Ia and/or Ib, the compound is a compound provided in Table A, herein, or a salt or hydrate thereof. Representative heteroaryl amide analogues provided herein include, but are not limited to, those specifically described in Examples 1-6 and accompanying Table A. It will be apparent that the specific compounds recited herein are representative only, and are not intended to limit the scope of the present invention. Further, as noted above, all compounds of the present invention may be present as a free acid or base, or as a pharmaceutically acceptable salt. In addition, other forms such as hydrates and prodrugs of such compounds are specifically contemplated by the present invention.
Within certain aspects of the present invention, heteroaryl amide analogues provided herein detectably alter (modulate) P2X7 receptor activity, as determined using an assay such as an assay recited in Example 7, herein. Additional assays that may be used for this purpose include assays that measure IL- lβ release; assays that measure uptake of a membrane-impermeant fluorescent dye such as YO-PROl; assays that measure lucifer yellow uptake; assays that measure ethidium bromide uptake; and assays that use calcium imaging to detect P2X7 activity; all of which assays are well known in the art. Certain modulators provided herein detectably modulate P2X7 receptor activity at micromolar concentrations, at nanomolar concentrations, or at subnanomolar concentrations.
As noted above, compounds that are P2X7 receptor antagonists are preferred within certain embodiments. IC5O values for such compounds may be determined using a standard in vitro P2X7 receptor-mediated calcium mobilization assay, as provided in Example 7. Briefly, cells expressing P2X7 receptor are contacted with a compound of interest and with an indicator of intracellular calcium concentration {e.g., a membrane permeable calcium sensitivity dye such as Fluo-3, Fluo-4 or Fura-2 (Invitrogen, Carlsbad, CA), each of which produce a fluorescent signal when bound to C^t+). Such contact is preferably carried out by one or more incubations of the cells in buffer or culture medium comprising either or both of the compound and the indicator in solution. Contact is maintained for an amount of time sufficient to allow the dye to enter the cells (e.g., 1-2 hours). Cells are washed or filtered to remove excess dye and are then contacted with a P2X7 receptor agonist (e.g., ATP or 2'(3')-O- (4-benzoyl-benzoyl)adenosine 5'-triphosephate at, for example, a concentration equal to the EC50 concentration), and a fluorescence response is measured. When agonist- contacted cells are contacted with a compound that is a P2X7 receptor antagonist, the fluorescence response is generally reduced by at least 20%, preferably at least 50% and more preferably at least 80%, as compared to cells that are contacted with the agonist in the absence of test compound. In certain embodiments, P2X7 receptor antagonists provided herein exhibit no detectable agonist activity an in vitro assay of P2X7 receptor agonism at a concentration of compound equal to the IC50. Certain such antagonists exhibit no detectable agonist activity an in vitro assay of P2X7 receptor agonism at a concentration of compound that is 100-fold higher than the IC50.
P2X7 receptor modulating activity may also, or alternatively, be assessed using an in vivo pain relief assay as provided in Example 8. Modulators provided herein preferably have a statistically significant specific effect on P2X7 receptor activity within such a functional assay.
In certain embodiments, preferred modulators are non-sedating. In other words, a dose of modulator that is twice the minimum dose sufficient to provide analgesia in an animal model for determining pain relief (such as a model provided in Example 8, herein) causes only transient (i.e., lasting for no more than 1A the time that pain relief lasts) or preferably no statistically significant sedation in an animal model assay of sedation (using the method described by Fitzgerald et al. (1988) Toxicology 49(2-3):433-9). Preferably, a dose that is five times the minimum dose sufficient to provide analgesia does not produce statistically significant sedation. More preferably, a modulator provided herein does not produce sedation at intravenous doses of less than 25 mg/kg (preferably less than 10 mg/kg) or at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg (preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg).
If desired, compounds provided herein may be evaluated for certain pharmacological properties including, but not limited to, oral bioavailability (preferred compounds are orally bioavailable to an extent allowing for therapeutically effective concentrations of the compound to be achieved at oral doses of less than 140 mg/kg, preferably less than 50 mg/kg, more preferably less than 30 mg/kg, even more preferably less than 10 mg/kg, still more preferably less than 1 mg/kg and most preferably less than 0.1 mg/kg), toxicity (a preferred compound is nontoxic when a therapeutically effective amount is administered to a subject), side effects (a preferred compound produces side effects comparable to placebo when a therapeutically effective amount of the compound is administered to a subject), serum protein binding and in vitro and in vivo half-life (a preferred compound exhibits an in vivo half-life allowing for Q.I.D. dosing, preferably T.I.D. dosing, more preferably B. LD. dosing, and most preferably once-a-day dosing). In addition, differential penetration of the blood brain barrier may be desirable for modulators used to treat pain or neurodegenerative disease by modulating CNS P2Xγ receptor activity such that total daily oral doses as described above provide such modulation to a therapeutically effective extent, while low brain levels of modulators used to treat peripheral nerve mediated pain or certain inflammatory diseases (e.g. rheumatoid arthritis) may be preferred (i.e., such doses do not provide brain (e.g., CSF) levels of the compound sufficient to significantly modulate P2X7 receptor activity). Routine assays that are well known in the art may be used to assess these properties, and identify superior compounds for a particular use. For example, assays used to predict bioavailability include transport across human intestinal cell monolayers, including Caco-2 cell monolayers. Penetration of the blood brain barrier of a compound in humans may be predicted from the brain levels of the compound in laboratory animals given the compound (e.g., intravenously). Serum protein binding may be predicted from albumin binding assays. Compound half-life is inversely proportional to the frequency of dosage of a compound. In vitro half-lives of compounds may be predicted from assays of microsomal half-life as described, for example, within Example 7 of U.S. Patent Application Publication Number 2005/0070547.
As noted above, preferred compounds provided herein are nontoxic. In general, the term "nontoxic" shall be understood in a relative sense and is intended to refer to any substance that has been approved by the United States Food and Drug Administration ("FDA") for administration to mammals (preferably humans) or, in keeping with established criteria, is susceptible to approval by the FDA for administration to mammals (preferably humans). In addition, a highly preferred nontoxic compound generally satisfies one or more of the following criteria: (1) does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production; (2) does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals; (3) does not cause substantial liver enlargement, or (4) does not cause substantial release of liver enzymes.
As used herein, a compound that does not substantially inhibit cellular ATP production is a compound that satisfies the criteria set forth in Example 8 of U.S. Patent Application Publication Number 2005/0070547. In other words, cells treated as described therein with 100 μM of such a compound exhibit ATP levels that are at least 50% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells. In more highly preferred embodiments, such cells exhibit ATP levels that are at least 80% of the ATP levels detected in untreated cells. A compound that does not significantly prolong heart QT intervals is a compound that does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals (as determined by electrocardiography) in guinea pigs, minipigs or dogs upon administration of a dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound. In certain preferred embodiments, a dose of 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally does not result in a statistically significant prolongation of heart QT intervals. A compound does not cause substantial liver enlargement if daily treatment of laboratory rodents (e.g., mice or rats) for 5-10 days with a dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound results in an increase in liver to body weight ratio that is no more than 100% over matched controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not cause liver enlargement of more than 75% or 50% over matched controls. If non-rodent mammals (e.g., dogs) are used, such doses should not result in an increase of liver to body weight ratio of more than 50%, preferably not more than 25%, and more preferably not more than 10% over matched untreated controls. Preferred doses within such assays include 0.01, 0.05. 0.1, 0.5, 1, 5, 10, 40 or 50 mg/kg administered parenterally or orally.
Similarly, a compound does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes if administration of twice the minimum dose that yields a serum concentration equal to the EC50 or IC5O at P2X7 receptor for the compound does not elevate serum levels of ALT, LDH or AST in laboratory animals (e.g., rodents) by more than 100% over matched mock-treated controls. In more highly preferred embodiments, such doses do not elevate such serum levels by more than 75% or 50% over matched controls. Alternatively, a compound does not promote substantial release of liver enzymes if, in an in vitro hepatocyte assay, concentrations (in culture media or other such solutions that are contacted and incubated with hepatocytes in vitro) that are equal to the EC50 or IC50 for the compound do not cause detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels seen in media from matched mock-treated control cells. In more highly preferred embodiments, there is no detectable release of any of such liver enzymes into culture medium above baseline levels when such compound concentrations are five-fold, and preferably ten-fold the EC50 or IC50 for the compound.
In other embodiments, certain preferred compounds do not inhibit or induce microsomal cytochrome P450 enzyme activities, such as CYP1A2 activity, CYP2A6 activity, CYP2C9 activity, CYP2C19 activity, CYP2D6 activity, CYP2E1 activity or
CYP3A4 activity at a concentration equal to the EC50 or IC5O at P2X7 receptor for the compound.
Certain preferred compounds are not clastogenic (e.g., as determined using a mouse erythrocyte precursor cell micronucleus assay, an Ames micronucleus assay, a spiral micronucleus assay or the like) at a concentration equal the EC5Q or IC5Q for the compound. In other embodiments, certain preferred compounds do not induce sister chromatid exchange (e.g., in Chinese hamster ovary cells) at such concentrations.
For detection purposes, as discussed in more detail below, modulators provided herein may be isotopically-labeled or radiolabeled. For example, compounds may have one or more atoms replaced by an atom of the same element having an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature. Examples of isotopes that can be present in the compounds provided herein include isotopes of hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorous, fluorine and chlorine, such as 2H, 3H, 11C, 13C, 14C, 15N, 18O, 17O, 31P, P, 35S, 18F and 36Cl. In addition, substitution with heavy isotopes such as deuterium (i.e., H) can afford certain therapeutic advantages resulting from greater metabolic stability, for example increased in vivo half-life or reduced dosage requirements and, hence, may be preferred in some circumstances.
Compounds may be radiolabeled by carrying out their synthesis using precursors comprising at least one atom that is a radioisotope. Each radioisotope is preferably carbon (e.g., 14C), hydrogen (e.g., 3H), sulfur (e.g., 35S), or iodine (e.g., I). Tritium labeled compounds may also be prepared catalytically via platinum- catalyzed exchange in tritiated acetic acid, acid-catalyzed exchange in tritiated trifluoroacetic acid, or heterogeneous-catalyzed exchange with tritium gas using the compound as substrate. In addition, certain precursors may be subjected to tritium- halogen exchange with tritium gas, tritium gas reduction of unsaturated bonds, or reduction using sodium borotritide, as appropriate. Preparation of radiolabeled compounds may be conveniently performed by a radioisotope supplier specializing in custom synthesis of radiolabeled probe compounds. PREPARATION OF HETEROARYL AMIDE ANALOGUES
Heteroaryl amide analogues may generally be prepared using standard synthetic methods. Starting materials are commercially available from suppliers such as Sigma-Aldrich Corp. (St. Louis, MO), or may be synthesized from commercially available precursors using established protocols. By way of example, a synthetic route similar to that shown in any of the following Schemes may be used, together with synthetic methods known in the art of synthetic organic chemistry. In some cases, protecting groups may be required during preparation. Such protecting groups can be removed by methods well known to those of ordinary skill in the art, such as methods described in Greene and Wuts, "Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis" (2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1991) or Philip J. Kocienski, "Protecting Groups'", 2nd ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York (2005). In some cases, further organic transformations may be performed using methods well known to those of ordinary skill in the art, such as methods described in Richard C. Larock, "Comprehensive Organic Transformation," (VCH Publisher, Inc. 1989). Each variable in the following Schemes refers to any group consistent with the description of the compounds provided herein. Representative reaction conditions for use within the following schemes are provided in the Examples.
Certain abbreviations used in the following Schemes and elsewhere herein include:
BOP benzotriazol- 1 -yloxytris(dimethylamino)phosphonium hexafluorophosphate δ chemical shift
DCM dichloromethane
DMF dimethylformamide DMSO dimethylsulfoxide
Et ethyl
EtOAc ethyl acetate
EtOH ethanol h hour(s)
1H NMR proton nuclear magnetic resonance
Hz hertz iPr isopropyl
MeOH methanol min minute(s)
Ms methanesulfonyl
(M+l) mass + 1 Ph3P triphenylphosphine POCl3 phosphorus oxychloride PTLC preparative thin layer chromatography rt room temperature TEA triethylamine
TFA trifluoroacetic acid
(CF3CO)2O trifluoroacetic anhydride
Schemes 1-8 illustrate certain embodiments of the present invention, and are intended to be exemplary only, and nonlimiting. For example, it will be apparent that each reaction described in a Scheme may be performed in combination with none, some or all of the other reactions described therein. In addition, various modifications to reaction conditions will be apparent, including the use of different solvents and acids/bases, and changes in reaction times and temperatures. All processes disclosed in association with the present invention are contemplated to be practiced on any scale, including milligram, gram, multigram, kilogram, multikilogram or commercial industrial scale. It will further be apparent that starting materials for each step, and each reaction product, may be the indicated compound or may be a salt (e.g., a pharmaceutically acceptable salt) or solvate (e.g., hydrate) thereof. Unless otherwise specified, each variable in the following Schemes is as defined above.
Scheme 1
Figure imgf000036_0001
Scheme 2
solvent / base heat (or) or , het ,eroary il m _ icr towa .v ,e ( vor) ' Buchwald
Figure imgf000036_0002
group
Figure imgf000036_0003
Scheme 3
Figure imgf000036_0004
Scheme 4
Figure imgf000037_0001
n = an integer (e g , from 1 to 8) L = leaving group
aq- base >
Figure imgf000037_0002
Scheme 5
solvent / base (or) microwave (or) , SO2 Mitsunobu conditi
Figure imgf000037_0003
amide formation
Figure imgf000037_0005
Figure imgf000037_0004
Scheme 6
Figure imgf000038_0001
LAH/solvent or H2/Raney Ni/NH3/MeOH
Figure imgf000038_0002
Scheme 6 illustrates a general method of preparing certain intermediates NH2-
CH2-CHRs-Y of Formula X wherein R5 is substituted phenyl or heteroaryl and Y = N- RsbRsb wherein R5b is independently hydrogen, d-Cβalkyl, or C3-C7cycloalkyl; or both Rsb are taken together to form a heterocycle. Strecker condensation of the aryl carboxaldehyde and amine either with TMSCN in a solvent such as acetonitrile, or with NaCN or KCN in a solvent such MeOH- water or water at pH 3-4 (adjusted by hydrogen chloride) gives the aminonitrile, which is reduced by LAH in a solvent such as THF or by hydrogenation with Raney Nickel as a catalyst in a solvent such as 7N ammonia in methanol to give the amine intermediate NH2-CH2-CHRs-Y.
Scheme 7 χ.R5 Y^CN ^CN
Y-CH2CN or
R- R5 X R5
Base/solvent
LAH/solvent γ or H2/Raney Ni/NH3/MeOH R5 2 or R5^ R5 2
Scheme 7 illustrates a general method of preparing certain intermediates NH2- CH2-CHR5-Y or NH2-CH2-CR5R5-Y of Formula X wherein Y is substituted phenyl or heteroaryl. Alkylation of the starting acetonitrile with one equivalent of X-R5 (X = Br or I), with base such as sodium hydride in a solvent such as THF-DMSO gives intermediate Y-X(R5)-CN. Alkylation of the starting acetonitrile with two equivalents of X-R5 (X=Br or I) or one equivalent of dibromo or diiodo (when R5 and R5 are taken together to form a ring) with base such as sodium hydride in a solvent such as THF-DMSO gives intermediate Y-X(R5)(R5)-CN. Reduction of either product by LAH in a solvent such as THF or by hydrogenation with Raney Nickel as a catalyst in a solvent such as 7N ammonia in methanol provides NH2-CH2-CHR5-Y or NH2-CH2- CR5R5-Y.
Scheme 8
Figure imgf000039_0001
Scheme 8 illustrates a general method of preparing certain intermediates NH2- CH2-CR5R5-Y of Formula X wherein R5 is independently hydrogen, Ci-C6alkyl, C3- C7cycloalkyl or phenyl; or both R5 are taken together to form a C3-C8cycloalkyl or heterocycle, and Y=N-R5bR5b wherein R5b is C1-C6 alkyl, optionally substituted with halogen, hydroxyl, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy or CO2H, or both R5b are taken together to form a 5- to 7-membered heterocycle. Strecker condensation of the ketone and amine either with TMSCN in a solvent such methanol with a catalyst such as ZnI2, or with NaCN or KCN in a solvent such MeOH- water or water at pH 3-4 (adjusted by hydrogen chloride) gives the aminonitrile. Reduction of the aminonitrile by LAH in a solvent such as THF or by hydrogenation with Raney Nickel as a catalyst in a solvent such as 7N ammonia in methanol gives NH2-CH2-CR5R5-Y.
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS The present invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising one or more compounds provided herein, together with at least one physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient. Pharmaceutical compositions may comprise, for example, one or more of water, buffers (e.g., sodium bicarbonate, neutral buffered saline or phosphate buffered saline), ethanol, mineral oil, vegetable oil, dimethylsulfoxide, carbohydrates (e.g., glucose, mannose, sucrose, starch, mannitol or dextrans), proteins, adjuvants, polypeptides or amino acids such as glycine, antioxidants, chelating agents such as EDTA or glutathione and/or preservatives. In addition, other active ingredients may (but need not) be included in the pharmaceutical compositions provided herein.
Pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated for any appropriate manner of administration, including, for example, topical, oral, nasal, rectal or parenteral administration. The term parenteral as used herein includes subcutaneous, intradermal, intravascular (e.g., intravenous), intramuscular, spinal, intracranial, intrathecal and intraperitoneal injection, as well as any similar injection or infusion technique. In certain embodiments, compositions suitable for oral use are preferred. Such compositions include, for example, tablets, troches, lozenges, aqueous or oily suspensions, dispersible powders or granules, emulsion, hard or soft capsules, or syrups or elixirs. Within yet other embodiments, pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated as a lyophilizate. Formulation for topical administration may be preferred for certain conditions (e.g., in the treatment of skin conditions such as burns or itch). Formulation for direct administration into the bladder (intravesicular administration) may be preferred for treatment of urinary incontinence and overactive bladder.
Compositions intended for oral use may further comprise one or more components such as sweetening agents, flavoring agents, coloring agents and/or preserving agents in order to provide appealing and palatable preparations. Tablets contain the active ingredient in admixture with physiologically acceptable excipients that are suitable for the manufacture of tablets. Such excipients include, for example, inert diluents (e.g., calcium carbonate, sodium carbonate, lactose, calcium phosphate or sodium phosphate), granulating and disintegrating agents (e.g., corn starch or alginic acid), binding agents (e.g., starch, gelatin or acacia) and lubricating agents (e.g., magnesium stearate, stearic acid or talc). Tablets may be formed using standard techniques, including dry granulation, direct compression and wet granulation. The tablets may be uncoated or they may be coated by known techniques.
Formulations for oral use may also be presented as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent (e.g., calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin), or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium (e.g., peanut oil, liquid paraffin or olive oil). Aqueous suspensions contain the active material(s) in admixture with suitable excipients, such as suspending agents (e.g., sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, hydropropylmethylcellulose, sodium alginate, polyvinylpyrrolidone, gum tragacanth and gum acacia); and dispersing or wetting agents (e.g., naturally- occurring phosphatides such as lecithin, condensation products of an alkylene oxide with fatty acids such as polyoxyethylene stearate, condensation products of ethylene oxide with long chain aliphatic alcohols such as heptadecaethyleneoxycetanol, condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and a hexitol such as polyoxyethylene sorbitol monooleate, or condensation products of ethylene oxide with partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol anhydrides such as polyethylene sorbitan monooleate). Aqueous suspensions may also comprise one or more preservatives, such as ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, one or more coloring agents, one or more flavoring agents, and/or one or more sweetening agents, such as sucrose or saccharin. Oily suspensions may be formulated by suspending the active ingredient(s) in a vegetable oil (e.g., arachis oil, olive oil, sesame oil or coconut oil) or in a mineral oil such as liquid paraffin. The oily suspensions may contain a thickening agent such as beeswax, hard paraffin or cetyl alcohol. Sweetening agents such as those set forth above, and/or flavoring agents may be added to provide palatable oral preparations. Such suspensions may be preserved by the addition of an anti-oxidant such as ascorbic acid.
Dispersible powders and granules suitable for preparation of an aqueous suspension by the addition of water provide the active ingredient in admixture with a dispersing or wetting agent, a suspending agent and one or more preservatives. Suitable dispersing or wetting agents and suspending agents are exemplified by those already mentioned above. Additional excipients, such as sweetening, flavoring and coloring agents, may also be present.
Pharmaceutical compositions may also be formulated as oil-in-water emulsions. The oily phase may be a vegetable oil (e.g., olive oil or arachis oil), a mineral oil (e.g., liquid paraffin) or a mixture thereof. Suitable emulsifying agents include naturally-occurring gums (e.g., gum acacia or gum tragacanth), naturally- occurring phosphatides (e.g., soy bean lecithin, and esters or partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol), anhydrides (e.g., sorbitan monoleate) and condensation products of partial esters derived from fatty acids and hexitol with ethylene oxide {e.g., polyoxy ethylene sorbitan monoleate). An emulsion may also comprise one or more sweetening and/or flavoring agents.
Syrups and elixirs may be formulated with sweetening agents, such as glycerol, propylene glycol, sorbitol or sucrose. Such formulations may also comprise one or more demulcents, preservatives, flavoring agents and/or coloring agents.
Formulations for topical administration typically comprise a topical vehicle combined with active agent(s), with or without additional optional components. Suitable topical vehicles and additional components are well known in the art, and it will be apparent that the choice of a vehicle will depend on the particular physical form and mode of delivery. Topical vehicles include water; organic solvents such as alcohols {e.g., ethanol or isopropyl alcohol) or glycerin; glycols {e.g., butylene, isoprene or propylene glycol); aliphatic alcohols {e.g., lanolin); mixtures of water and organic solvents and mixtures of organic solvents such as alcohol and glycerin; lipid- based materials such as fatty acids, acylglycerols (including oils, such as mineral oil, and fats of natural or synthetic origin), phosphoglycerides, sphingolipids and waxes; protein-based materials such as collagen and gelatin; silicone-based materials (both non-volatile and volatile); and hydrocarbon-based materials such as microsponges and polymer matrices. A composition may further include one or more components adapted to improve the stability or effectiveness of the applied formulation, such as stabilizing agents, suspending agents, emulsifying agents, viscosity adjusters, gelling agents, preservatives, antioxidants, skin penetration enhancers, moisturizers and sustained release materials. Examples of such components are described in Martindale~The Extra Pharmacopoeia (Pharmaceutical Press, London 1993) and Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 21st ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Philadelphia, PA (2005). Formulations may comprise microcapsules, such as hydroxymethylcellulose or gelatin-microcapsules, liposomes, albumin microspheres, microemulsions, nanoparticles or nanocapsules.
A topical formulation may be prepared in any of a variety of physical forms including, for example, solids, pastes, creams, foams, lotions, gels, powders, aqueous liquids and emulsions. The physical appearance and viscosity of such pharmaceutically acceptable forms can be governed by the presence and amount of emulsifier(s) and viscosity adjuster(s) present in the formulation. Solids are generally firm and non-pourable and commonly are formulated as bars or sticks, or in particulate form; solids can be opaque or transparent, and optionally can contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product. Creams and lotions are often similar to one another, differing mainly in their viscosity; both lotions and creams may be opaque, translucent or clear and often contain emulsifiers, solvents, and viscosity adjusting agents, as well as moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product. Gels can be prepared with a range of viscosities, from thick or high viscosity to thin or low viscosity. These formulations, like those of lotions and creams, may also contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product. Liquids are thinner than creams, lotions, or gels and often do not contain emulsifiers. Liquid topical products often contain solvents, emulsifiers, moisturizers, emollients, fragrances, dyes/colorants, preservatives and other active ingredients that increase or enhance the efficacy of the final product.
Suitable emulsifiers for use in topical formulations include, but are not limited to, ionic emulsifiers, cetearyl alcohol, non-ionic emulsifiers like poly oxy ethylene oleyl ether, PEG-40 stearate, ceteareth-12, ceteareth-20, ceteareth-30, ceteareth alcohol, PEG-100 stearate and glyceryl stearate. Suitable viscosity adjusting agents include, but are not limited to, protective colloids or non-ionic gums such as hydroxyethylcellulose, xanthan gum, magnesium aluminum silicate, silica, microcrystalline wax, beeswax, paraffin, and cetyl palmitate. A gel composition may be formed by the addition of a gelling agent such as chitosan, methyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose, polyvinyl alcohol, polyquaterniums, hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, carbomer or ammoniated glycyrrhizinate. Suitable surfactants include, but are not limited to, nonionic, amphoteric, ionic and anionic surfactants. For example, one or more of dimethicone copolyol, polysorbate 20, polysorbate 40, polysorbate 60, polysorbate 80, lauramide DEA, cocamide DEA, and cocamide MEA, oleyl betaine, cocamidopropyl phosphatidyl PG-dimonium chloride, and ammonium laureth sulfate may be used within topical formulations. Suitable preservatives include, but are not limited to, antimicrobials such as methylparaben, propylparaben, sorbic acid, benzoic acid, and formaldehyde, as well as physical stabilizers and antioxidants such as vitamin E, sodium ascorbate/ascorbic acid and propyl gallate. Suitable moisturizers include, but are not limited to, lactic acid and other hydroxy acids and their salts, glycerin, propylene glycol, and butylene glycol. Suitable emollients include lanolin alcohol, lanolin, lanolin derivatives, cholesterol, petrolatum, isostearyl neopentanoate and mineral oils. Suitable fragrances and colors include, but are not limited to, FD&C Red No. 40 and FD&C Yellow No. 5. Other suitable additional ingredients that may be included a topical formulation include, but are not limited to, abrasives, absorbents, anti-caking agents, anti-foaming agents, anti-static agents, astringents (e.g., witch hazel, alcohol and herbal extracts such as chamomile extract), binders/excipients, buffering agents, chelating agents, film forming agents, conditioning agents, propellants, opacifying agents, pH adjusters and protectants.
An example of a suitable topical vehicle for formulation of a gel is: hydroxypropylcellulose (2.1%); 70/30 isopropyl alcohol/water (90.9%); propylene glycol (5.1%); and Polysorbate 80 (1.9%). An example of a suitable topical vehicle for formulation as a foam is: cetyl alcohol (1.1%); stearyl alcohol (0.5%; Quaternium 52 (1.0%); propylene glycol (2.0%); Ethanol 95 PGF3 (61.05%); deionized water (30.05%); P75 hydrocarbon propellant (4.30%). All percents are by weight. Typical modes of delivery for topical compositions include application using the fingers; application using a physical applicator such as a cloth, tissue, swab, stick or brush; spraying (including mist, aerosol or foam spraying); dropper application; sprinkling; soaking; and rinsing.
A pharmaceutical composition may be prepared as a sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspension. The compound(s) provided herein, depending on the vehicle and concentration used, can either be suspended or dissolved in the vehicle.
Such a composition may be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing, wetting agents and/or suspending agents such as those mentioned above.
Among the acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, 1,3- butanediol, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride solution. In addition, sterile, fixed oils may be employed as a solvent or suspending medium. For this purpose any bland fixed oil may be employed, including synthetic mono- or diglycerides. In addition, fatty acids such as oleic acid find use in the preparation of injectible compositions, and adjuvants such as local anesthetics, preservatives and/or buffering agents can be dissolved in the vehicle.
Pharmaceutical compositions may also be formulated as suppositories (e.g., for rectal administration). Such compositions can be prepared by mixing the drug with a suitable non-irritating excipient that is solid at ordinary temperatures but liquid at the rectal temperature and will therefore melt in the rectum to release the drug.
Suitable excipients include, for example, cocoa butter and polyethylene glycols.
Compositions for inhalation typically can be provided in the form of a solution, suspension or emulsion that can be administered as a dry powder or in the form of an aerosol using a conventional propellant (e.g., dichlorodifiuoromethane or trichlorofluoromethane) .
Pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated for release at a predetermined rate. Instantaneous release may be achieved, for example, via sublingual administration (i.e., administration by mouth in such a way that the active ingredient(s) are rapidly absorbed via the blood vessels under the tongue rather than via the digestive tract). Controlled release formulations (i.e., formulations such as a capsule, tablet or coated tablet that slows and/or delays release of active ingredient(s) following administration) may be administered by, for example, oral, rectal or subcutaneous implantation, or by implantation at a target site. In general, a controlled release formulation comprises a matrix and/or coating that delays disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract (or implantation site) and thereby provides a delayed action or a sustained action over a longer period. One type of controlled- release formulation is a sustained-release formulation, in which at least one active ingredient is continuously released over a period of time at a constant rate. Preferably, the therapeutic agent is released at such a rate that blood (e.g., plasma) concentrations are maintained within the therapeutic range, but below toxic levels, over a period of time that is at least 4 hours, preferably at least 8 hours, and more preferably at least 12 hours. Such formulations may generally be prepared using well known technology and administered by, for example, oral, rectal or subcutaneous implantation, or by implantation at the desired target site. Carriers for use within such formulations are biocompatible, and may also be biodegradable; preferably the formulation provides a relatively constant level of modulator release. The amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the site of implantation, the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
Controlled release may be achieved by combining the active ingredient(s) with a matrix material that itself alters release rate and/or through the use of a controlled- release coating. The release rate can be varied using methods well known in the art, including (a) varying the thickness or composition of coating, (b) altering the amount or manner of addition of plasticizer in a coating, (c) including additional ingredients, such as release-modifying agents, (d) altering the composition, particle size or particle shape of the matrix, and (e) providing one or more passageways through the coating. The amount of modulator contained within a sustained release formulation depends upon, for example, the method of administration (e.g., the site of implantation), the rate and expected duration of release and the nature of the condition to be treated or prevented.
The matrix material, which itself may or may not serve a controlled-release function, is generally any material that supports the active ingredient(s). For example, a time delay material such as glyceryl monosterate or glyceryl distearate may be employed. Active ingredient(s) may be combined with matrix material prior to formation of the dosage form (e.g., a tablet). Alternatively, or in addition, active ingredient(s) may be coated on the surface of a particle, granule, sphere, microsphere, bead or pellet that comprises the matrix material. Such coating may be achieved by conventional means, such as by dissolving the active ingredient(s) in water or other suitable solvent and spraying. Optionally, additional ingredients are added prior to coating (e.g., to assist binding of the active ingredient(s) to the matrix material or to color the solution). The matrix may then be coated with a barrier agent prior to application of controlled-release coating. Multiple coated matrix units may, if desired, be encapsulated to generate the final dosage form.
In certain embodiments, a controlled release is achieved through the use of a controlled release coating (i.e., a coating that permits release of active ingredient(s) at a controlled rate in aqueous medium). The controlled release coating should be a strong, continuous film that is smooth, capable of supporting pigments and other additives, non-toxic, inert and tack-free. Coatings that regulate release of the modulator include pH-independent coatings, pH-dependent coatings (which may be used to release modulator in the stomach) and enteric coatings (which allow the formulation to pass intact through the stomach and into the small intestine, where the coating dissolves and the contents are absorbed by the body). It will be apparent that multiple coatings may be employed (e.g., to allow release of a portion of the dose in the stomach and a portion further along the gastrointestinal tract). For example, a portion of active ingredient(s) may be coated over an enteric coating, and thereby released in the stomach, while the remainder of active ingredient(s) in the matrix core is protected by the enteric coating and released further down the GI tract. pH dependent coatings include, for example, shellac, cellulose acetate phthalate, polyvinyl acetate phthalate, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose phthalate, methacrylic acid ester copolymers and zein.
In certain embodiments, the coating is a hydrophobic material, preferably used in an amount effective to slow the hydration of the gelling agent following administration. Suitable hydrophobic materials include alkyl celluloses (e.g., ethylcellulose or carboxymethylcellulose), cellulose ethers, cellulose esters, acrylic polymers (e.g., poly(acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethoxy ethyl methacrylates, cyanoethyl methacrylate, methacrylic acid alkamide copolymer, poly(methyl methacrylate), polyacrylamide, ammonio methacrylate copolymers, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer, poly(methacrylic acid anhydride) and glycidyl methacrylate copolymers) and mixtures of the foregoing. Representative aqueous dispersions of ethylcellulose include, for example, AQUACO AT® (FMC Corp., Philadelphia, PA) and SURELEASE® (Colorcon, Inc., West Point, PA), both of which can be applied to the substrate according to the manufacturer's instructions. Representative acrylic polymers include, for example, the various EUDRAGIT® (Rohm America, Piscataway, NJ) polymers, which may be used singly or in combination depending on the desired release profile, according to the manufacturer's instructions.
The physical properties of coatings that comprise an aqueous dispersion of a hydrophobic material may be improved by the addition or one or more plasticizers. Suitable plasticizers for alkyl celluloses include, for example, dibutyl sebacate, diethyl phthalate, triethyl citrate, tributyl citrate and triacetin. Suitable plasticizers for acrylic polymers include, for example, citric acid esters such as triethyl citrate and tributyl citrate, dibutyl phthalate, polyethylene glycols, propylene glycol, diethyl phthalate, castor oil and triacetin.
Controlled-release coatings are generally applied using conventional techniques, such as by spraying in the form of an aqueous dispersion. If desired, the coating may comprise pores or channels or to facilitate release of active ingredient. Pores and channels may be generated by well known methods, including the addition of organic or inorganic material that is dissolved, extracted or leached from the coating in the environment of use. Certain such pore-forming materials include hydrophilic polymers, such as hydroxyalkylcelluloses (e.g., hydroxypropylmethylcellulose), cellulose ethers, synthetic water-soluble polymers (e.g., polyvinylpyrrolidone, cross-linked polyvinylpyrrolidone and polyethylene oxide), water-soluble polydextrose, saccharides and polysaccharides and alkali metal salts. Alternatively, or in addition, a controlled release coating may include one or more orifices, which may be formed my methods such as those described in US Patent Nos. 3,845,770; 4,034,758; 4,077,407; 4,088,864; 4,783,337 and 5,071,607. Controlled-release may also be achieved through the use of transdermal patches, using conventional technology (see, e.g., US Patent No. 4,668,232).
Further examples of controlled release formulations, and components thereof, may be found, for example, in US Patent Nos. 4,572,833; 4,587,117; 4,606,909; 4,610,870; 4,684,516; 4,777,049; 4,994,276; 4,996,058; 5,128,143; 5,202,128;
5,376,384; 5,384,133; 5,445,829; 5,510,119; 5,618,560; 5,643,604; 5,891,474;
5,958,456; 6,039,980; 6,143,353; 6,126,969; 6,156,342; 6,197,347; 6,387,394;
6,399,096; 6,437,000; 6,447,796; 6,475,493; 6,491,950; 6,524,615; 6,838,094;
6,905,709; 6,923,984; 6,923,988; and 6,911,217; each of which is hereby incorporated by reference for its teaching of the preparation of controlled release dosage forms.
In addition to or together with the above modes of administration, a compound provided herein may be conveniently added to food or drinking water (e.g., for administration to non-human animals including companion animals (such as dogs and cats) and livestock). Animal feed and drinking water compositions may be formulated so that the animal takes in an appropriate quantity of the composition along with its diet. It may also be convenient to present the composition as a premix for addition to feed or drinking water. Compounds are generally administered in a therapeutically effective amount.
Preferred systemic doses are no higher than 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day (e.g., ranging from about 0.001 mg to about 50 mg per kilogram of body weight per day), with oral doses generally being about 5-20 fold higher than intravenous doses (e.g., ranging from 0.01 to 40 mg per kilogram of body weight per day).
The amount of active ingredient that may be combined with the carrier materials to produce a single dosage unit will vary depending, for example, upon the patient being treated, the particular mode of administration and any other coadministered drugs. Dosage units generally contain between from about 10 μg to about 500 mg of active ingredient. Optimal dosages may be established using routine testing, and procedures that are well known in the art.
Pharmaceutical compositions may be packaged for treating conditions responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation (e.g., pain, inflammation, neurodegeneration or other condition described herein). Packaged pharmaceutical compositions generally include (i) a container holding a pharmaceutical composition that comprises at least one modulator as described herein and (ii) instructions (e.g., labeling or a package insert) indicating that the contained composition is to be used for treating a condition responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation in the patient.
METHODS OF USE P2X7 receptor modulators provided herein may be used to alter activity and/or activation of P2X7 receptors in a variety of contexts, both in vitro and in vivo. Within certain aspects, P2X7 receptor antagonists may be used to inhibit the binding of ligand agonist to P2X7 receptor in vitro or in vivo. In general, such methods comprise the step of contacting a P2X7 receptor with one or more P2X7 receptor modulators provided herein, in the presence of ligand in aqueous solution and under conditions otherwise suitable for binding of the ligand to P2X7 receptor. The modulator(s) are generally present at a concentration that is sufficient to alter P2X7 receptor-mediated signal transduction (using an assay provided in Example 7). The P2X7 receptor may be present in solution or suspension (e.g., in an isolated membrane or cell preparation), or in a cultured or isolated cell. Within certain embodiments, the P2X7 receptor is expressed by a cell that is present in a patient, and the aqueous solution is a body fluid. Preferably, one or more modulators are administered to an animal in an amount such that the modulator is present in at least one body fluid of the animal at a therapeutically effective concentration that is 20 micromolar or less, 10 micromolar or less, 5 micromolar or less, or 1 micromolar or less. For example, such compounds may be administered at a therapeutically effective dose that is less than 20 mg/kg body weight, preferably less than 5 mg/kg and, in some instances, less than 1 mg/kg.
Also provided herein are methods for modulating, preferably reducing, cellular P2X7 receptor activation and/or activity, such as signal-transducing activity (e.g., calcium conductance). Such modulation may be achieved by contacting a P2X7 receptor (either in vitro or in vivo) with one or more modulators provided herein under conditions suitable for binding of the modulator(s) to the receptor. The modulator(s) are generally present at a concentration that is sufficient to alter P2X7 receptor- mediated signal transduction as described herein. The receptor may be present in solution or suspension, in a cultured or isolated cell preparation or in a cell within a patient. For example, the cell may be contacted in vivo in an animal. Modulation of signal tranducing activity may be assessed by detecting an effect on calcium ion conductance (also referred to as calcium mobilization or flux). Modulation of signal transducing activity may alternatively be assessed by detecting an alteration of a symptom (e.g., pain or inflammation) of a patient being treated with one or more modulators provided herein. P2X7 receptor modulator(s) provided herein are preferably administered to a patient (e.g., a human) orally or topically, and are present within at least one body fluid of the animal while modulating P2X7 receptor signal-transducing activity.
The present invention further provides methods for treating conditions responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation. Within the context of the present invention, the term "treatment" encompasses both disease-modifying treatment and symptomatic treatment, either of which may be prophylactic (i.e., before the onset of symptoms, in order to prevent, delay or reduce the severity of symptoms) or therapeutic (i.e., after the onset of symptoms, in order to reduce the severity and/or duration of symptoms). A condition is "responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation" if it is characterized by inappropriate activity of a P2X7 receptor, regardless of the amount of P2X7 agonist present locally, and/or if modulation of P2X7 receptor activity results in alleviation of the condition or a symptom thereof. Such conditions include, for example, pain, inflammation, cardiovascular disorders, ocular disorders, neurodegenerative disorders and respiratory disorders (such as cough, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, chronic bronchitis, cystic fibrosis and rhinitis, including allergic rhinitis, such as seasonal an perennial rhinitis, and non-allergic rhinitis), fibrosis as well as other conditions described in more detail below. Such conditions may be diagnosed and monitored using criteria that have been established in the art. Patients may include humans, domesticated companion animals and livestock, with dosages as described above.
Treatment regimens may vary depending on the compound used and the particular condition to be treated; however, for treatment of most disorders, a frequency of administration of 4 times daily or less is preferred. In general, a dosage regimen of 2 times daily is more preferred, with once a day dosing particularly preferred. For the treatment of acute pain, a single dose that rapidly reaches effective concentrations is desirable. It will be understood, however, that the specific dose level and treatment regimen for any particular patient will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the specific compound employed, the age, body weight, general health, sex, diet, time of administration, route of administration, and rate of excretion, drug combination and the severity of the particular disease undergoing therapy. In general, the use of the minimum dose sufficient to provide effective therapy is preferred. Patients may generally be monitored for therapeutic effectiveness using medical or veterinary criteria suitable for the condition being treated or prevented.
Pain that may be treated using the modulators provided herein includes, for example, acute, chronic, inflammatory, and neuropathic pain. Specific pain indications that may be treated as described herein include, but are not limited to, pain associated with osteoarthritis or rheumatoid arthritis; various neuropathic pain syndromes (such as post-herpetic neuralgia, trigeminal neuralgia, reflex sympathetic dystrophy, diabetic neuropathy, Guillian Barre syndrome, fibromyalgia, oral neuropathic pain, phantom limb pain, post-mastectomy pain, peripheral neuropathy, myofascial pain syndromes, MS-related neuropathy, HIV or AIDS-related neuropathy, and chemotherapy-induced and other iatrogenic neuropathies); visceral pain, (such as that associated with gastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD), irritable bowel syndrome, inflammatory bowel disease, pancreatitis, intestinal gas, gynecological disorders (e.g., menstrual pain, dysmenorrhea, pain associated with cystitis, labor pain, chronic pelvic pain, chronic prostitis, endometriosis, heart pain and abdominal pain), and urological disorders); dental pain (e.g., toothache, denture pain, nerve root pain, pain resulting from periodontal disease, and pain due to dental surgery including operative and post-operative pain); headache (e.g., headaches involving peripheral nerve activity, sinus headache, cluster headache (i.e., migranous neuralgia) tension headache, migraine, temporomandibular pain and maxillary sinus pain); stump pain; meralgia paresthetica; burning-mouth syndrome; pain associated with nerve and root damage, including as pain associated with peripheral nerve disorders (e.g., nerve entrapment and brachial plexus avulsions, amputation, peripheral neuropathies including bilateral peripheral neuropathy, tic douloureux, atypical facial pain, nerve root damage, and arachnoiditis), causalgia, neuritis (including, for example, sciatic neuritis, peripheral neuritis, polyneuritis, optic neuritis, postfebrile neuritis, migrating neuritis, segmental neuritis and Gombault's neuritis), neuronitis, neuralgias (e.g., those mentioned above, cervicobrachial neuralgia, cranial neuralgia, geniculate neuralgia, glossopharyngial neuralgia, migranous neuralgia, idiopathic neuralgia, intercostals neuralgia, mammary neuralgia, mandibular joint neuralgia, Morton's neuralgia, nasociliary neuralgia, occipital neuralgia, red neuralgia, Sluder's neuralgia, splenopalatine neuralgia, supraorbital neuralgia and vidian neuralgia); surgery-related pain; musculoskeletal pain; central nervous system pain (e.g., pain due to brain stem damage, sciatica, and ankylosing spondylitis); and spinal pain, including spinal cord injury-related pain.
Further pain conditions that can be treated as described herein include Charcot's pains, ear pain, muscle pain, eye pain, orofacial pain (e.g., odontalgia), carpel tunnel syndrome, acute and chronic back pain (e.g., lower back pain), gout, scar pain, hemorrhoidal pain, dyspeptic pains, angina, nerve root pain, "non-painful" neuropathies, complex regional pain syndrome, homotopic pain and heterotopic pain - including pain associated with carcinoma, often referred to as cancer-associated pain (e.g., in patients with bone cancer), pain (and inflammation) associated with venom exposure (e.g., due to snake bite, spider bite, or insect sting) and trauma- associated pain (e.g., post-surgical pain, episiotomy pain, pain from cuts, musculoskeletal pain, bruises and broken bones, and burn pain, especially primary hyperalgesia associated therewith). Additional pain conditions that may be treated as described herein include pain associated with autoimmune diseases or immunodeficiency disorders, hot flashes, burns, sunburn, and pain that results from exposure to heat, cold or external chemical stimuli.
Conditions associated with inflammation and/or immune system disorders that may be treated using the modulators provided herein include, but are not limited to, arthritis (including osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriatic arthritis, Reiter's syndrome, gout, traumatic arthritis, rubella arthritis, rheumatoid spondylitis, gouty arthritis and juvenile arthritis); cystic fibrosis; uveitis; systemic lupus erythematosus (and associated glomerulonephritis); spondyloarthropathies; psoriasis; scleritis; allergic conditions (including allergic reactions, allergic rhinitis, allergic contact hypersensitivity, allergic dermatitis, eczema and contact dermatitis), reperfusion injury (e.g., cardiac and renal reperfusion injury), respiratory system disorders (including hyper-responsiveness of the airway, cough, asthma (e.g., to prevent or decrease the severity of both acute early phase asthma attack and the late phase reactions that follow such an asthma attack; including bronchial, allergic, intrinsic, extrinsic, exercise-induced, drug-induced (e.g., aspirin or NSAID-induced) and dust- induced asthma), reactive airway disease, emphysema, acute (adult) respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS), bronchitis (e.g., infectious and eosinophilic bronchitis), bronchiectasis, chronic pulmonary obstructive disorder (COPD), chronic pulmonary inflammatory disease, silicosis, pulmonary sarcoidosis, farmer's lung, hypersensitivity pneumonitis and lung fibrosis), viral infection, fungal infection, bacterial infection, Crohn's disease, glomerulornephritis, HIV infection and AIDS, irritable bowel syndrome, inflammatory bowel disease, dermatomyositis, multiple sclerosis, pemphigus, pemphigoid, scleroderma, myasthenia gravis, autoimmune hemolytic and thrombocytopenic states, Goodpasture's syndrome (and associated glomerulonephritis and pulmonary hemorrhage), tissue graft rejection, hyperacute rejection of transplanted organs, allograft rejection, organ transplant toxicity, neutropenia, sepsis, septic shock, endotoxic shock, conjunctivitis shock, toxic shock syndrome, Alzheimer's disease, inflammation associated with severe burns, lung injury, systemic inflammatory response syndrome (SIRS), neonatal-onset multisystem inflammatory disease (NOMID), Hashimoto's thyroiditis, Grave's disease, Addison's disease, idiopathic thrombocytopaenic purprua, eosinophilic fascitis, hyper-IgE syndrome, antiphospholipid syndrome, leprosy, Sezary syndrome, paraneoplastic syndromes, Muckle- Wells syndrome, lichen planus, familial cold autoinflamrnatory syndrome (FCAS), colitis, ruptured abdominal aortic aneurysm and multiple organ dysfunction syndrome (MODS). Also included are pathologic sequellae associated with insulin- dependent diabetes mellitus (including diabetic retinopathy), lupus nephropathy, Heyman nephritis, membranous nephritis and other forms of glomerulonephritis, macular degeneration, contact sensitivity responses, and inflammation resulting from contact of blood with artificial surfaces as occurs, for example, during extracorporeal circulation of blood (e.g., during hemodialysis or via a heart-lung machine, for example, in association with vascular surgery such as coronary artery bypass grafting or heart valve replacement) such as extracorporeal post-dialysis syndrome, or in association with contact with other artificial vessel or container surfaces (e.g., ventricular assist devices, artificial heart machines, transfusion tubing, blood storage bags, plasmapheresis, plateletpheresis, and the like).
Still further conditions that may be treated using the modulators provided herein include: Cardiovascular disorders, such as cardiovascular disease, stroke, cerebral ischemia, myocardial infarction, atherosclerosis, ischemic heart disease, ischemia- reperfusion injury, aortic aneurysm, and congestive heart failure;
Ocular disorders such as glaucoma;
Neurological disorders (e.g., neurodegeneration), such as neurodegenerative conditions associated with progressive CNS disorders, including, but not limited to,
Alzheimer's disease, Parkinson's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Huntington's disease, Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, dementia with Lewy bodies, traumatic brain injury, spinal cord injury, neurotrauma, cerebral amyloid angiopathy, and encephalitis; epilepsy and seizure disorders; multiple sclerosis and other demyelinating syndromes; cerebral atherosclerosis; vasculitis; temporal arteritis; myasthenia gravis; neurosarcoidosis; and central and peripheral nervous system complications of malignant, infectious or autoimmune processes; the modulators provided herein may also be used to promote neuroregeneration;
Centrally-mediated neuropsychiatric disorders, such as depression, depression mania, bipolar disease, anxiety, schizophrenia, eating disorders, sleep disorders and cognition disorders; and Other disorders, such as cirrhosis, interstitial fibrosis, prostate, bladder and bowel dysfunction (e.g., urinary incontinence, urinary hesitancy, rectal hypersensitivity, fecal incontinence and benign prostatic hypertrophy); itch/pruritus; obesity; lipid disorders; cancer; hypertension; renal disorders; abnormal wound healing; myoblastic leukemia; diabetes; meningitis; varicose veins; muscle degeneration; cachexia; restenosis; thrombosis; cerebral malaria; disorders of bones and joints (e.g., osteoporosis, bone resorption disease, loosening of artificial joint implants, and others listed above); epidermolysis bullosa; ocular angiogenesis; corneal injury; corneal scarring; and tissue ulceration. Modulators provided herein may also be used for neuroprotection of the optic nerve (e.g., to inhibit the death of retinal ganglion cells in a patient).
Within other aspects, modulators provided herein may be used within combination therapy for the treatment of conditions responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation (e.g., conditions involving pain and/or inflammatory components). Such conditions include, for example, autoimmune disorders and pathologic autoimmune responses known to have an inflammatory component including, but not limited to, arthritis (especially rheumatoid arthritis), psoriasis, Crohn's disease, lupus erythematosus, irritable bowel syndrome, tissue graft rejection, and hyperacute rejection of transplanted organs. Other such conditions include trauma (e.g., injury to the head or spinal cord), cardio- and cerebro-vascular disease and certain infectious diseases.
Within such combination therapy, a modulator is administered to a patient along with a second therapeutic agent (e.g., an analgesic and/or anti-inflammatory agent). The modulator and second therapeutic agent may be present in the same pharmaceutical composition, or may be administered separately in either order. Antiinflammatory agents include, for example, non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs (NSAIDs), non-specific and cyclooxygenase-2 (COX-2) specific cyclooxgenase enzyme inhibitors, gold compounds, corticosteroids, methotrexate, leflunomide, cyclosporine A, IM gold, minocycline, azathioprine, tumor necrosis factor (TNF) receptor antagonists, soluble TNF alpha receptor (etanercept), anti-TNF alpha antibodies (e.g., infliximab and adalimumab), anti-C5 antibodies, interleukin-1 (IL-I) receptor antagonists (e.g., anakinra or IL-I trap), IL- 18 binding protein, CTLA4-Ig (e.g., abatacept), anti-human IL-6 receptor monoclonal antibody (e.g., tocilizumab), LFA-3-Ig fusion proteins (e.g., alefacept), LFA-I antagonists, anti-VLA4 monoantibody (e.g., natalizumab), anti-CDl la monoclonal antibody, anti-CD20 monoclonal antibody (e.g., rituximab), anti-IL-12 monoclonal antibody, anti-IL-15 monoclonal antibody, CDP 484, CDP 870, chemokine receptor antagonists, selective iNOS inhibitors, p38 kinase inhibitors, integrin antagonists, angiogenesis inhibitors, and TMI-I dual inhibitors. Further anti-inflammatory agents include meloxicam, rofecoxib, celecoxib, etoricoxib, parecoxib, valdecoxib and tilicoxib.
NSAIDs include, but are not limited to, ibuprofen, flurbiprofen, naproxen or naproxen sodium, diclofenac, combinations of diclofenac sodium and misoprostol, sulindac, oxaprozin, diflunisal, piroxicam, indomethacin, etodolac, fenoprofen calcium, ketoprofen, sodium nabumetone, sulfasalazine, tolmetin sodium, and hydroxychloroquine. One class of NSAIDs consists of compounds that inhibit cyclooxygenase (COX) enzymes; such compounds include celecoxib and rofecoxib. NSAIDs further include salicylates such as acetylsalicylic acid or aspirin, sodium salicylate, choline and magnesium salicylates, and salsalate, as well as corticosteroids such as cortisone, dexamethasone, methylprednisolone, prednisolone, prednisolone sodium phosphate, and prednisone.
Suitable dosages for P2X7 receptor modulator within such combination therapy are generally as described above. Dosages and methods of administration of anti-inflammatory agents can be found, for example, in the manufacturer's instructions in the Physician's Desk Reference. In certain embodiments, the combination administration of a modulator with an anti-inflammatory agent results in a reduction of the dosage of the anti-inflammatory agent required to produce a therapeutic effect (i.e., a decrease in the minimum therapeutically effective amount). Thus, preferably, the dosage of anti-inflammatory agent in a combination or combination treatment method is less than the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the anti-inflammatory agent without combination administration of a modulator. More preferably this dosage is less than 3A, even more preferably less than 1A, and highly preferably, less than 1A of the maximum dose, while most preferably the dose is less than 10% of the maximum dose advised by the manufacturer for administration of the anti-inflammatory agent(s) when administered without combination administration of a modulator. It will be apparent that the dosage amount of modulator component of the combination needed to achieve the desired effect may similarly be reduced by the co-administraction of the anti-inflammatory agent.
In certain preferred embodiments, the combination administration of a modulator with an anti-inflammatory agent is accomplished by packaging one or more modulators and one or more anti-inflammatory agents in the same package, either in separate containers within the package or in the same contained as a mixture of one or more modulators and one or more anti-inflammatory agents. Preferred mixtures are formulated for oral administration (e.g., as pills, capsules, tablets or the like). In certain embodiments, the package comprises a label bearing indicia indicating that the one or more modulators and one or more anti-inflammatory agents are to be taken together for the treatment of an inflammatory pain condition.
Within further aspects, modulators provided herein may be used in combination with one or more additional pain relief medications. Certain such medications are also anti-inflammatory agents, and are listed above. Other such medications are analgesic agents, including narcotic agents which typically act at one or more opioid receptor subtypes (e.g., μ, K and/or δ), preferably as agonists or partial agonists. Such agents include opiates, opiate derivatives and opioids, as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts and hydrates thereof. Specific examples of narcotic analgesics include, within preferred embodiments, alfentanil, alphaprodine, anileridine, bezitramide, buprenorphine, butorphanol, codeine, diacetyldihydromorphine, diacetylmorphine, dihydrocodeine, diphenoxylate, ethylmorphine, fentanyl, heroin, hydrocodone, hydromorphone, isomethadone, levomethorphan, levorphane, levorphanol, meperidine, metazocine, methadone, methorphan, metopon, morphine, nalbuphine, opium extracts, opium fluid extracts, powdered opium, granulated opium, raw opium, tincture of opium, oxycodone, oxymorphone, paregoric, pentazocine, pethidine, phenazocine, piminodine, propoxyphene, racemethorphan, racemorphan, sulfentanyl, thebaine and pharmaceutically acceptable salts and hydrates of the foregoing agents.
Other examples of narcotic analgesic agents include acetorphine, acetyldihydrocodeine, acetylmethadol, allylprodine, alphracetylmethadol, alphameprodine, alphamethadol, benzethidine, benzylmorphine, betacetylmethadol, betameprodine, betamethadol, betaprodine, clonitazene, codeine methylbromide, codeine-N-oxide, cyprenorphine, desomorphine, dextromoramide, diampromide, diethylthiambutene, dihydromorphine, dimenoxadol, dimepheptanol, dimethylthiamubutene, dioxaphetyl butyrate, dipipanone, drotebanol, ethanol, ethylmethylthiambutene, etonitazene, etorphine, etoxeridine, furethidine, hydromorphinol, hydroxypethidine, ketobemidone, levomoramide, levophenacylmorphan, methyldesorphine, methyldihydromorphine, morpheridine, morphine, methylpromide, morphine methylsulfonate, morphine-N-oxide, myrophin, naloxone, naltyhexone, nicocodeine, nicomorphine, noracymethadol, norlevoφhanol, normethadone, normorphine, norpipanone, pentazocaine, phenadoxone, phenampromide, phenomorphan, phenoperidine, piritramide, pholcodine, proheptazoine, properidine, propiran, racemoramide, thebacon, trimeperidine and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts and hydrates thereof.
Further specific representative analgesic agents include, for example acetaminophen (paracetamol); aspirin and other NSAIDs described above; NR2B antagonists; bradykinin antagonists; anti-migraine agents; anticonvulsants such as oxcarbazepine and carbamazepine; antidepressants (such as TCAs, SSRIs, SNRIs, substance P antagonists, etc.); spinal blocks; pentazocine/naloxone; meperidine; levorphanol; buprenorphine; hydromorphone; fentanyl; sufentanyl; oxycodone; oxycodone/acetaminophen, nalbuphine and oxymorphone. Still further analgesic agents include CB2-receptor agonists, such as AMI 241, capsaicin receptor antagonists and compounds that bind to the α2δ subunit of voltage-gated calcium channels, such as gabapentin and pregabalin.
Representative anti-migraine agents for use in combination with a modulator provided herein include CGRP antagonists, capsaicin receptor antagonists, ergotamines and 5-HT1 agonists, such as sumatripan, naratriptan, zolmatriptan and rizatriptan.
Within still further aspects, modulators provided herein may be used, for example, in the treatment of pulmonary disorders such as asthma, in combination with one or more beta(2)-adrenergic receptor agonists or leukotriene receptor antagonists
(e.g., agents that inhibits the cysteinyl leukotriene CySLT1 receptor). CySLT1 antagonists include montelukast, zafirlukast, and pranlukast.
For retinal neuroprotection and treatment of ocular disorders, P2X7 receptor modulators may be administered to the eye in combination with, for example, one or more of an agent that inhibits ATP release, an agent that enhances conversion of ATP to adenosine and/or an agent that inhibits Ca+2 influx into retinal ganglion cells. Such agents include, for example, adenosine A3 receptor agonists, adenosine A1 receptor agonists, ectonucleotidase agonists, Ca+ chelating agents and NMDA receptor antagonists.
Suitable dosages for P2X7 receptor modulator within such combination therapy are generally as described above. Dosages and methods of administration of other pain relief medications can be found, for example, in the manufacturer's instructions in the Physician's Desk Reference. In certain embodiments, the combination administration of a modulator with one or more additional pain medications results in a reduction of the dosage of each therapeutic agent required to produce a therapeutic effect {e.g., the dosage or one or both agent may less than 3A, less than 1A, less than 1A or less than 10% of the maximum dose listed above or advised by the manufacturer). For use in combination therapy, pharmaceutical compositions as described above may further comprise one or more additional medications as described above. In certain such compositions, the additional medication is an analgesic. Also provided herein are packaged pharmaceutical preparations comprising one or more modulators and one or more additional medications (e.g., analgesics) in the same package. Such packaged pharmaceutical preparations generally include (i) a container holding a pharmaceutical composition that comprises at least one modulator as described herein; (ii) a container holding a pharmaceutical composition that comprises at least one additional medication (such as a pain relief and/or antiinflammatory medication) as described above and (iii) instructions (e.g., labeling or a package insert) indicating that the compositions are to be used simultaneously, separately or sequentially for treating or preventing a condition responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation in the patient (such as a condition in which pain and/or inflammation predominates).
Within separate aspects, the present invention provides a variety of non- pharmaceutical in vitro and in vivo uses for the modulator compounds provided herein. For example, such compounds may be labeled and used as probes for the detection and localization of P2X7 receptor (in samples such as cell preparations or tissue sections, preparations or fractions thereof). In addition, modulators provided herein that comprise a suitable reactive group (such as an aryl carbonyl, nitro or azide group) may be used in photoaffinity labeling studies of receptor binding sites. In addition, modulators provided herein may be used as positive controls in assays for receptor activity or as radiotracers (e.g., in receptor mapping procedures). For example, a modulator compound may be labeled using any of a variety of well known techniques (e.g., radiolabeled with a radionuclide such as tritium, as described herein), and used as a probe for receptor autoradiography (receptor mapping) of P2X7 receptor in cultured cells or tissue samples, which may be performed as described by Kuhar in sections 8.1.1 to 8.1.9 of Current Protocols in Pharmacology (1998) John Wiley & Sons, New York, which sections are incorporated herein by reference. Such receptor mapping procedures also include methods that can be used to characterize P2X7 receptor in living subjects, such as positron emission tomography (PET) imaging or single photon emission computerized tomography (SPECT).
The following Examples are offered by way of illustration and not by way of limitation. Unless otherwise specified all reagents and solvent are of standard commercial grade and are used without further purification. Using routine modifications, the starting materials may be varied and additional steps employed to produce other compounds provided herein.
Mass spectroscopy data provided herein is Electrospray MS, obtained in positive ion mode. Unless otherwise specified, such data is obtained using a
Micromass Time-of-Flight LCT (Waters Corp.; Milford, MA), equipped with a
Waters 600 pump (Waters Corp.), Waters 996 photodiode array detector (Waters
Corp.), and a Gilson 215 autosampler (Gilson, Inc.; Middleton, WI). MassLynx™
(Waters Corp.) version 4.0 software with OpenLynx Global Server™, OpenLynx™ and AutoLynx™ processing is used for data collection and analysis. MS conditions are as follows: capillary voltage = 3.5 kV; cone voltage = 30 V, desolvation and source temperature = 35O0C and 12O0C, respectively; mass range = 181-750 with a scan time of 0.22 seconds and an interscan delay of 0.05 seconds.
For data marked with a "§," mass spectroscopy data is obtained using a Waters ZMD II Mass Spectrometer (Waters Corp.), equipped with a Waters 600 pump
(Waters Corp.), Waters 996 photodiode array detector (Waters Corp.), and a Gilson
215 autosampler (Gilson, Inc.; Middleton, WI). MassLynx™ (Waters Corp.) version
4.0 software with OpenLynx Global Server™, OpenLynx™ and AutoLynx™ processing is used for data collection and analysis. MS conditions are as follows: capillary voltage = 3.5 kV; cone voltage = 30 V, desolvation and source temperature = 25O0C and 1000C, respectively; mass range = 100-800 with a scan time of 0.5 seconds and an interscan delay of 0.1 seconds. For either method, sample volume of 1 microliter is injected onto a 50x4.6mm
Chromolith SpeedROD RP- 18e column (Merck KGaA, Darmstadt, Germany), and eluted using a 2-phase linear gradient at a flow rate of 6 ml/min. Sample is detected using total absorbance count over the 220-340nm UV range. The elution conditions are: Mobile Phase A - 95% water, 5% MeOH with 0.05% TFA; Mobile Phase B - 5% water, 95% MeOH with 0.025% TFA. The following gradient is used: 0-0.5 min i 0- 100%B, hold at 100%B to 1.2 min, return to 10%B at 1.21 min. Inject to inject cycle is 2.15 min.
Where indicated, LC retention times (RT) are provided in minutes.
EXAMPLE 1
N-(Adamantan- 1 -ylmethyl)- 1 -pyrimidin-2- yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxamide
Step 1. Methyl l-(pyrimidin-2-yl)-l H-indole-3 -carboxylate
Figure imgf000061_0001
Potassium t-butoxide (2.52 g, 0.022 mol) is added to a mixture of methyl IH- indole-3- carboxylate (3.5 g, 0.02 mol) and 2-chloropyrimidine (2.28 g, 0.02 mol) in 50 mL of dioxane. The reaction mixture is heated to 110 0C and stirred for 20 h. The dioxane is removed in vacuo, and the residue is diluted with water (100 mL). The solid is filtered and purified by silica gel column chromatography (15% EtOAc/DCM) to afford the title compound as a white solid. Step 2. l-(Pyrimidin-2-yl)-lH-indole-3-carboxylic acid
Figure imgf000062_0001
1.0 N aqueous NaOH (10 mL) is added to a mixture of methyl l-(pyrimidin-2- yl)-lH-indole-3-carboxylate (1.4 g, 0.0055 moles) in 50 mL of EtOH and heated at
70 0C for 4h. The reaction mixture is concentrated in vacuo, diluted with water (50 mL), acidified with concentrated HCl to pH 2.0. The white solid separated is filtered, washed with water (2 x 25 mL) and dried to afford the title compound.
Step 3. N-(Adamantan-l-ylmethyl)-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-indole-3- carboxamide
Figure imgf000062_0002
To a mixture of l-(pyrimidin-2-yl)-lH-indole-3-carboxylic acid (72 mg, 0.3 mmol) in 2.0 mL of DMF is added sequentially diisopropylethylamine (0. 2 mL), 1- adamantane methylamine (49.5 mg, 0.3 mmol), and BOP, (150 mg). The resulting mixture is stirred at rt for 20 h. Water (3 mL) is added, and the solid is filtered and purified by silica gel column chromatography (25% EtOAc/hexane) to give the title compound as a white solid. 1K NMR (400 MHz5 DMSO-d6) δ 8.81 (IH, d), 8.71 (3H, dd,), 8.13 (IH, d), 7.33 (2H, m), 7.11 (IH, d), 6.13 (IH, s), 3.21 (2H, d), 1.61 (12H, m). Mass spec. (387.24, M+H).
EXAMPLE 2 N-IY 1 -Pyridin-3 -ylcyclohexyDmethyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl-4-(trifluoromethyl)- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxamide
Step 1. 4-Bromo-l H-indole-3 -carbaldehyde
Figure imgf000063_0001
A round bottom flask charged with 50 mL of DMF is cooled to 0 0C, and phosphorous oxychloride (8.ImL, 88 mmol) is added dropwise. After stirring for approx. 5 min, a solution of 4-bromoindole (5.0 mL, 40 mmol) in 50 mL of DMF is added dropwise. The ice bath is removed, and the reaction mixture is stirred for 1 h at rt. The reaction becomes a very thick suspension. The mixture is cooled back to 0 0C and carefully quenched with 22 g of KOH in 80 mL of water. The resulting mixture is partitioned between EtOAc (200 mL) and sat. NaHCO3 (100 mL). The EtOAc layer is washed with brine (100 mL) and water (100 mL), dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and evaporated in vacuo to give a brown solid, which is triturated with ether to afford the title compound as an off-white solid.
Step 2. 4-(Trifluoromethyl)-l H-indole-3 -carbaldehyde
Figure imgf000063_0002
Methyl 2-(fluorosulfonyl)difluoroacetate (3.5 mL, 27.6 mmol) and copper (I) iodide (5.3 g, 27.6 mmol) are added to a solution of 4-bromo-l H-indole-3 - carbaldehyde (3.1 g, 13.8 mmol) in 65 mL of DMF. The reaction is heated to 85 0C for 18 h. After cooling to rt, the mixture is diluted with EtOAc and filtered through celite. The celite is washed well with EtOAc. The filtrate is washed with water (3 times) and brine, dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and evaporated to give a brown oil. Purification by silica gel column chromatography (gradient from 10% EtOAc/hexane to 40% EtOAc/hexane) affords the title compound as a brown solid.
Step 3. 1 -Pyrimidin-2-yl-4-(trifluoromethyl)- 1 H-indole-3 -carbaldehyde
Figure imgf000064_0001
Potassium t-butoxide (753 mg, 6.71 mmol) is added to a mixture of 4- (trifluoromethyl)-l H-indole-3 -carbaldehyde (1.3 g, 6.10 mmol) and 2- chloropyrimidine (699 mg, 6.10 mmol) in 20 mL of dioxane. The reaction mixture is heated to 100 0C and stirred for 15 h. The dioxane is removed in vacuo, and the residue is partitioned between EtOAc and water (30 mL each). The aqueous phase is extracted twice more with EtOAc (20 mL each), and the combined EtOAc extracts are dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and evaporated in vacuo to give a brown solid. Purification by silica gel column chromatography (2% EtOAc/DCM) affords the title compound as a light brown solid.
Step 4. l-Pyrimidin-2-yl-4-(trifluoromethyl)-l H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid
Figure imgf000064_0002
To a solution of l-pyrimidin-2-yl-4-(trifluoromethyl)-l H-indole-3 - carbaldehyde (450 mg, 1.55 mmol) in 15 mL of dioxane and 5 mL of water is added sodium chlorite (183 mg, 2.02 mmol) and sulfamic acid (858 mg, 8., 84 mmol). After stirring at rt for 10 min., the reaction is carefully quenched with sat. aqueous NaHCO3 and concentrated in vacuo. The residue is taken up in 10% MeOH/DCM and washed with 10% HCl and water. The combined aqueous phases are back extracted with 10% MeOH/DCM (4 times), and the combined organic extracts are dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and evaporated in vacuo to give a pale yellow solid. Trituration with ether affords the title compound as a white solid.
Step 5. (1 -Pyridin-3 -yl-cyclohexy^-methylamine
Figure imgf000065_0001
To a mixture of pyridin-3-yl-acetonitrile (14.65 g) and 1,5-dibromo-pentane (28.52 g) in THF (450 mL) and DMSO (450 mL) is added NaH (60% in mineral oil, 10.42 g) portionwise at 0 °C over 1 h. The mixture is allowed to warm to RT and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture is poured into water and extracted twice with EtOAc. The extract is concentrated and the residue is purified by silica gel chromatography to give l-pyridin-3-yl-cyclohexanecarbonitrile.
To a solution of the above product (18.5 g) in 140 mL of 7.0 N NH3 in MeOH is added carefully slurry of Raney Nickel (16 g). The mixture is hydrogenated at 50 psi overnight. The mixture is filtered through Celite and concentrated in vacuo to give the title compound
Step 6. N- [( 1 -Pyridin-3 -ylcyclohexyl)methyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl-4- (trifluoromethyl)- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxamide
Figure imgf000065_0002
To a mixture of 1-((1 -methyl- lH-imidazol-2-yl)methyl)-lH-indole-2- carboxylic acid (21 mg, 0.05 mmol) in 1.0 mL of DMF is added sequentially diisopropylethylamine (0.02 mL, 0.10 mmol), 1 -(I -pyridin-3 - ylcyclohexyl)methanamine (9.5 mg, 0.05 mmol), and BOP (27 mg, 0.06 mmol). The resulting mixture is stirred at rt for 20 h. Water (3 niL) is added, and the mixture is extracted with EtOAc (5 mL). The EtOAc layer is dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by preparative chromatography (4% MeOH/DCM) to give the title compound as a light brown solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 9.10 (IH, d, J 8.4), 8.95 (2H, d, J4.8), 8.62 (IH, d, J2), 8.40 (2H, m), 8.16 (IH, t, J 6), 7.83 (IH, d, J 8), 7.63 (IH, d, J 7.6), 7.51 (2H, m), 7.36 (IH, m), 3.39 (2H, d, J 6.4), 2.20 (2H, d, J 13.6), 1.70 (t, 2H, J 11.2), 1.58 (m, 2H), 1.35 (m, 4H). Mass spec. (480.24, M+H).
EXAMPLE 3
4-Chloro-iV-|~( 1 -pyridin-3 -ylcyclohexγl)methyl]- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- Ii7-indole- 3-carboxamide
Step 1. l-(4-Chloro-lH-indol-3-yl)-2,2,2-trifluoroethanone
Figure imgf000066_0001
Trifluoroacetic anhydride (27.5 mL, 200 mmol) is added to a solution of 4- chloroindole (25.0 g, 165 mmol) and DMF (170 mL) under N2 over 30 min. The reaction vessel is sealed. After 20 h, the solution is poured into water (700 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (300 mL). The organics are dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated. Purification by flash silica gel column chromatography (4:1 hexane/ EtOAc to 1 : 1 hexane/EtOAc) affords the title compound as a red-brown solid.
Step 2. l-(4-Chloro-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-l//-indol-3-yl)-2,2,2-trifluoroethanone
Figure imgf000066_0002
A mixture of l-(4-chloro-lH-indol-3-yl)-2,2,2-trifluoroethanone (10.1 g, 40.8 mmol), 2-chloropyrimidine (9.3 g, 81 mmol), cesium carbonate (26.6 g, 81.6 mmol), and 1,4-dioxane (80 mL) under N2 is warmed to 100 °C for 3 h. After cooling to rt, water (200 mL) is added. The precipitate is collected by filtration to afford the title compound as a tan powder.
Step 3. 4-Chloro-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-indole-3-carboxylic acid
Figure imgf000067_0001
A mixture of l-(4-chloro-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-indol-3-yl)-2,2,2- trifluoroethanone (8.33 g, 25.6 mmol), 10 M aqueous NaOH (60 mL), water (20 mL), and ethanol (20 mL) under air is warmed to 65 0C for 20 h. After cooling to rt, the volatiles are removed under reduced pressure. The aqueous mixture is cooled to 0 °C and then acidified with 5 M aqueous HCl (110 mL). The mixture is filtered. The filtrate is washed with H2O (50 mL) and then with Et2O (100 mL) to afford the title compound as a tan powder. Step 4. 4-Chloro-N-[(l-pyridin-3-ylcyclohexyl)methyl]-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH- indole-3 -carboxamide
Figure imgf000067_0002
BOP (58 mg, 130 mmol) is added to a slurry of 4-chloro-l-pyrimidin-2-yl- lH-indole-3-carboxylic acid (27 mg, 98 mmol), (l-pyridin-3- ylcyclohexyl)methylamine (21 mg, 110 mmol), Z-Pr2NEt (50 μL, 290 mmol), and DMF (0.5 mL) under N2. The reaction vessel is sealed and the solution is left to stir for 64 h. The solution is poured into 50% sat. aqueous NaHCO3 (10 mL) and then extracted with EtOAc (2 X 10 mL). The combined organics are dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated. Purification by PTLC (95:5 DCM/MeOH) affords the title compound as a white powder. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ: 8.61 - 8.77 (m, 4H), 8.55 (s, IH), 8.41 (s, IH), 7.75 (d, IH), 7.08 - 7.31 (m, 4H), 6.14 (s, IH), 3.68 (d, 2H), 2.11 - 2.22 (m, 2H), 1.28 - 1.86 (m, 8H). LC-MS m/z (M + H+): 446.18. EXAMPLE 4
N 1 -(Y 1 -methyl- 1 H-imidazol-2-yl)methyl)-N-(Y 1 -(pyridin-3 - yl)cyclohexyl)methyl)- 1 H-indole-2-carboxamide
Step 1. Ethyl 1-((1 -methyl- lH-imidazol-2-yl)methyl)-lH-indole-2-carboxylate
Figure imgf000068_0001
60% NaH (527 mg, 0.0132 mol) is added to a mixture of ethyl lH-indole-2- carboxylate (1.13 g, 0.0059 mol) in DMF (20 mL) at rt and stirred for 10 mins. 2- Chloromethyl-1-methylimidazole hydrochloride is then added to the mixture and stirred for 20 h. The mixture is diluted with ice water (100 mL) and the white solid is filtered to afford the title compound.
Step 2. 1 -(( 1 -Methyl- 1 H-imidazol-2-yl)methyl)- 1 H-indole-2-carboxylic acid
Figure imgf000068_0002
1.0 N aqueous NaOH (10 mL) is added to a mixture of ethyl 1 -((1 -methyl- IH- imidazol-2-yl)methyl)-lH-indole-2-carboxylate (1.5 g, 0.0053 moles) in 25 mL of EtOH and stirred at 25 0C for 16 h. The reaction mixture is concentrated in vacuo, diluted with water (50 mL), and acidified with concentrated HCl to pH 2.0. The white solid separated is filtered, washed with water (2 x 25 mL) and dried to afford the title compound. Step 3. N 1-((1 -methyl- lH-imidazol-2-yl)methyl)-N-((l-(pyridin-3- yl)cyclohexyl) methyl)- 1 H-indole-2-carboxamide
Figure imgf000069_0001
To a mixture of 1-((1 -methyl- lH-imidazol-2-yl)methyl)-lH-indole-2- carboxylic acid (51 mg, 0.2 mmol) ) in 2.0 mL of DMF is added sequentially diisopropylethylamine (0.2 mL), l-(l-pyridin-3-ylcyclohexyl)methanamine (38 mg, 0.25 mmol), and BOP reagent (100 mg, 0.22 mmol). The resulting mixture is stirred at rt for 20 h. Water (3 mL) is added, and the mixture is extracted with EtOAc (5 mL). The EtOAc layer is dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and evaporated in vacuo. The residue is purified by silica gel column chromatography (4% MeOH/DCM) to give the title compound as a white solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 8.56 (IH, s), 8.34 (2H, m), 7.70 (IH, d), 7.58 (IH, d), 7.53 (IH, d), 7.25 (IH, m), 7.17 (IH, t), 7.00 (3H, m), 6.67 (IH, s), 5.71 (2H, s), 3.46 (3H, s), 3.32 (2H, d,), 2.14 (d, 2H), 1.14-1.63 (8H, m). Mass spec. (428.28, M+H).
EXAMPLE 5
2- Adamantan- 1 -yl-N-(4-chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indol-3 -yl)-acetamide
Step 1. 4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carbonyl azide
Figure imgf000069_0002
Ethyl chloroformate (230 μL, 2.4 mmol) is added dropwise over 5 min to a slurry of 4-chloro-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-indole-3-carboxylic acid (629 mg, 2.30 mmol) in /Pr2NEt (420 μL, 2.4 mmol) and acetone (7.0 mL) under N2 at -10 0C. After 1 h, sodium azide (450 mg, 6.9 mmol) in water (4 niL) is added in one portion and the mixture is left to stir under air for 15 h. The volatiles are removed under reduced pressure. The resulting aqueous mixture is diluted with water (10 mL) and then filtered. The solids are collected and dried under reduced pressure to afford the title compound as a tan powder.
Step 2. 4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indol-3 -ylamine
Figure imgf000070_0001
A slurry of 4-chloro-l -pyrimidin-2-yl- lH-indole-3-carbonyl azide (442 mg, 1.48 mmol) in toluene (5 mL) under air is warmed to 100 0C for 1 h. Concentrated HCl (1 mL) is added dropwise. The mixture is warmed to 110 0C for 2 h. The volatiles are removed under reduced pressure. TEA (1 mL) and water (10 mL) are added. The mixture is extracted with CH2Cl2 (4 X 30 mL) and the combined organics are dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated. Purification by flash column chromatography (5:1 hexanes:EtOAc to 3:1 hexanes:EtOAc) affords the title compound as a tan solid. LC-MS m/z (M + H+): 244.99.
Step 3. 2- Adamantan- 1 -yl-N-(4-chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indol-3 -yl)- acetamide
Figure imgf000070_0002
BOP (135 mg, 305 μmol) is added to a slurry of 4-chloro-l-pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indol-3 -ylamine (50 mg, 200 μmol), 1-adamantaneacetic acid (52 mg, 270 μmol),
/Pr2NEt (70 μL, 400 μmol), and DMF (1.0 mL) under N2. The reaction vessel is sealed and the solution is left to stir for 4.5 days. Water (5 mL) is added and the crude product is collected by filtration. The solid is dissolved in EtOAc (40 mL) and then washed with a 1:1 solution of water and brine (20 mL). The organics are dried over Na2SO4, filtered, and concentrated. Purification by preparative layer chromatography (7.5:1 hexanes:EtOAc) affords the title compound as an ivory powder. 1H NMR (400 MHz, CDCl3) δ: 9.10 (s, IH), 8.81 (d, IH), 8.67 (d, 2H), 8.64 (bs, IH), 7.24 (t, IH), 7.17 (d, IH), 7.04 (t, IH), 2.20 (s, 2H), 1.94 - 2.03 (m, 3H), 1.58 - 1.81 (m, 12H). LC-MS m/z (M + H+): 421.11.
EXAMPLE 6
4-Chloro-N-|Y 1 -pyridin-3 -ylcvclohexyDmethyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H- pyrrolo[2,3-blpyridine-3-carboxamide
Step 1. 4-Chloro-lH-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-carbaldehyde
Figure imgf000071_0001
A mixture of 4-chloro-lH-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine (1.2 g, 7.6 mmol, prepared essentially as described in Wang et al, J. Org. Chem. 2006, 77, 4021-4023) and hexamethylenetetramine (1.6 g, 11.4 mmol) in 10 ml of 33% aqueous acetic acid is heated to reflux and stirred for 14 h. The clear solution is cooled to rt and diluted with water. The mixture becomes cloudy, and a solid begins to precipitate out of solution. The mixture is cooled in an ice bath and stirred for 30 min. The precipitated solid is then collected by vacuum filtration and dried in vacuo to afford the title compound as a light brown solid. Mass spec. (180.92, M+H).
Step 2. 4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-pyrrolo [2,3 -b]pyridine-3 -carbaldehyde
Figure imgf000071_0002
A mixture of 4-chloro-lH-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-carbaldehyde (220 mg, 1.22 mmol), 2-chloropyrimidine (210 mg, 1.83 mmol), and cesium carbonate (476 mg, 1.46 mmol) in 5-10 ml of dioxane is heated to 100 0C. After stirring for 15 h, the reaction mixture is cooled and the dioxane is removed in vacuo. The residue is slurried in water and filtered. The collected solid is washed with more water and dried in vacuo to afford the title compound as a light brown solid. Mass spec. (258.95, M+H).
Step 3. 4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-pyrrolo [2,3 -b]pyridine-3 -carboxylic acid
Figure imgf000072_0001
To a mixture of 4-chloro-l -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-pyrrolo [2, 3 -b]pyridine-3- carbaldehyde (88 mg, 0.34 mmol) in 3 ml of dioxane and 1 ml of water is added sodium chlorite (40 mg, 0.44 mmol) and sulfamic acid (188 mg, 1.94 mmol). After stirring at rt for 20 min, the solvents are removed in vacuo. The residue is taken up in 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2, and the resulting mixture is filtered. The filtrate is concentrated to give the title compound as a brown solid. Mass spec. (274.95, M+H).
Step 4. 4-Chloro-N-[(l -pyridin-3 -ylcyclohexyl)methyl]- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H- pyrrolo [2,3 -b]pyridine-3 -carboxamide
Figure imgf000072_0002
To a mixture of 4-chloro-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3- carboxylic acid (45 mg, 0.16 mmol) in 1.0 ml of DMF is added sequentially diisopropylethylamine (0.06 ml, 0.32 mmol), l-(l-pyridin-3- ylcyclohexyl)methanamine (30 mg, 0.16 mmol), and BOP (84 mg, 0.19 mmol). The resulting mixture is stirred at rt for 20 h. Water (3 ml) is added, and the precipitated solid is collected by vacuum filtration and dried in vacuo to afford the title compound as a brown solid. 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSOd6) δ 8.97 (2H, d, J 4.8), 8.61 (IH, s), 8.35 (3H, m), 8.23 (IH, s), 7.79 (IH, d, J6.8), 7.54 (IH, t, J4.4), 7.39 (IH, d, J5.2), 7.32 (IH, bs), 3.41 (2H, d, J5.6), 2.17 (2H, m), 1.2-1.8 (8H, m). Mass spec. (447.15, M+H).
Additional heteroaryl amide analogues prepared using the general methodologies hereindisclosed are listed in Table A. In the column of Table A labeled "IC5O," a "*" indicates that the IC50 determined as described in Example 7A is 2 micromolar or less (i.e., the concentration of such compounds that is required to provide a 50% decrease in the fluorescence response of cells exposed to 80 μM of (2'(3')-O-(4-benzoyl-benzoyl)adenosme 5'-triphosephate is 2 micromolar or less).
Mass spectroscopy data is provided in Table I as (M+ 1) in the column headed "M+H." The LC retention time, in minutes, is provided in the column headed Rj.
TABLE A
Figure imgf000073_0001
Figure imgf000074_0001
Figure imgf000075_0001
Figure imgf000076_0001
Figure imgf000077_0001
Figure imgf000078_0001
Figure imgf000079_0001
Figure imgf000080_0001
Figure imgf000081_0001
Figure imgf000082_0001
Figure imgf000083_0001
Figure imgf000084_0001
Figure imgf000085_0001
Figure imgf000086_0001
Figure imgf000087_0001
Figure imgf000088_0001
Figure imgf000089_0001
Figure imgf000090_0001
Figure imgf000091_0001
Figure imgf000092_0001
Figure imgf000093_0001
Figure imgf000094_0001
Figure imgf000095_0001
Figure imgf000096_0001
Figure imgf000097_0001
Figure imgf000098_0001
Figure imgf000099_0001
Figure imgf000100_0001
Figure imgf000101_0001
Figure imgf000102_0001
Figure imgf000103_0001
Figure imgf000104_0001
Figure imgf000105_0001
Figure imgf000106_0001
Figure imgf000107_0001
Figure imgf000108_0001
EXAMPLE 7
P2X7 Calcium Mobilization Assay
This Example illustrates representative calcium mobilization assays for use in evaluating test compounds for agonist and antagonist activity. A. HIGH THROUGHPUT ASSAY OF P2X7 RECEPTORS
SH-SY5Y cells, ATCC Number CRL-2266, (American Type Culture Collection, Manassas, VA) are cultured under DMEM/High medium supplemented with 10% FBS, and 10 mM HEPES (Invitrogen Corp., Carlsbad, CA) in 5% CO2 and at 37 °C. One day prior to the experiment, cells are plated at a density of 100,000 cells/well in a 96 well black/clear TC plate (Corning® Costar®, Sigma-Aldrich Co., St. Louis, MO). At the beginning of the experiment, the culture medium is removed and cells are incubated with 50 μL of 2.3 μM Fluo-4 AM dye (Invitrogen Corp.) in the assay solution (5 mM KCl, 9.6 mM NaH2PO4H2O, 25 mM HEPES, 280 mM Sucrose, 5 mM Glucose, and 0.5 mM CaCl2; pH is adjusted to 7.4 with NaOH) for an hour at 37 °C. After one hour dye incubation, wells are rinsed once with 50 μL assay solution, and are then incubated for an hour at rt with 100 μL assay solution containing the test compound. The final concentration of test compound generally ranges from 1 to 2500 nM; for positive control cells, no test compound is added. After the one hour incubation, plates are transferred to a FLIPRTETRA instrument (Molecular Devices, Sunnyvale, CA) for calcium mobilization analysis.
For determination of antagonist activity, 50 μL of P2X7 agonist (2'(3')-O-(4- benzoyl-benzoyl)adenosine 5'-triphosephate (BzATP; Sigma-Aldrich) in the assay solution is transferred using the FLIPR into the plate, such that the final agonist concentration is 80 μM (about EC50). In negative control cells, 50 μL of assay solution without agonist is added at this stage. The peak fluorescence signal over a 2 minute period is then measured.
The data is analyzed as follows. First, the average maximum relative fluorescent unit (RFU) response from the negative control wells (no agonist) is subtracted from the maximum response detected for each of the other experimental wells. Second, average maximum RFU response is calculated for the positive control wells (agonist wells). Then, percent inhibition for each compound tested is calculated using the equation:
Percent Inhibition = 100 - 100 x (Peak Signal in Test Cells / Peak Signal in Control Cells) The % inhibition data is plotted as a function of test compound concentration and test compound IC50 is determined using, for example, KALEIDAGRAPH software (Synergy Software, Reading, PA) best fit of the data to the equation: y = m1*(l/(l+(m2/m0)m3)) where y is the percent inhibition, m0 is the concentration of the agonist, In1 is the maximum RFU, m2 corresponds to the test compound IC50 (the concentration required to provide a 50% decrease, relative to the response observed in the presence of agonist and without antagonist) and m3 is the Hill coefficient. Alternatively, test compound IC50 is determined using a linear regression in which x is ln(concentration of test compound) and y is ln(percent inhibition^ 100 - percent inhibition). Data with a percent inhibition that is greater than 90% or less than 15% are rejected and are not used in the regression. The IC50 calculated in this fashion is e^mtercep s ope' For antagonists of the P2X7 receptor, the calculated IC50 is preferably below 20 micromolar, more preferably below 10 micromolar, even more preferably below 5 micromolar and most preferably below 1 micromolar.
Similar assays are performed in the absence of added agonist for the determination of agonist activity of the test compounds. Within such assays, the ability of a test compound to act as an agonist of P2Xγ receptor is determined by measuring the fluorescence response elicited by the test compound as a function of compound concentration. P2X7 receptor antagonists that exhibit no detectable agonist activity elicit no detectable fluorescence response at a concentration of 2,500 nM.
B. ELECTROPHYSIOLOGY ASSAY FOR P2X7 RECEPTORS
SH-SY5Y cells are cultured under DMEM/High medium supplemented with 10% FBS, and 10 mM HEPES (Invitrogen Corp., Carlsbad, CA) in 5% CO2 and at 37 °C, and are split onto 12 mm round PoIy-D-Ly sine (PDL) coated coverslips (BD Biosciences, San Jose, CA) in a 35 mm dish with a density of 130K cells/dish a day prior to the experiment. Whole cell voltage clamp recordings are made with the Axopatch-200B amplifier (Axon instruments, Foster City, CA). The recording electrodes are pulled from borosilicate pipettes (World Precision Instruments, Sarasota, FL) on a horizontal puller (Sutter Instrument Model P-87) and have resistances ranging from 2 to 3 MΩ when backfilled with internal solution. All voltage protocols are generated using pClamp 8 (Axon Instruments) software. Data are digitized at 1 or 5 kHz and recorded onto a PC for further analysis. Data are analyzed using Clampfϊt (Axon Instruments), Excel (Microsoft, Redmond, WA), and Origin software (MicroCal, LLC; Northampton, MA). All whole-cell recordings are conducted at rt. Internal solution contains (in niM): 100 KF, 40 KCl, 5 NaCl, 10 EGTA and 10 HEPES (pH = 7.4 adjusted with KOH). The external solution contains 70 mM NaCl, 0.3 mM CaCl2, 5 mM KCl, 20 mM HEPES, 10 mM glucose, and 134 mM sucrose (pH = 7.4 adjusted with NaOH). AU chemicals are from Sigma, unless otherwise stated.
P2X7 receptor is activated by 200 μM of P2X7 agonist, BzATP. At a holding potential of -80 mV, the activated inward current is recorded in the presence and absence of the test compound. Then, percent inhibition for each compound tested is calculated using the equation:
% Inhibition = 100 - 100 x (Current Amplitude in Compound / Current Amplitude in Control). To determine a test compound's IC50 for P2X7 receptor electrophysiologically, several concentrations of the compound are tested and their inhibitions on P2X7 currents are calculated as above. This dose-response curve is best fitted using Origin software (Microcal, MA) with the following equation:
Percent Inhibition = 100/(1 + (IC50/C)N) where C is the concentration of the antagonist, N is the Hill coefficient, and IC50 represents the compound IC50 value against P2X7 receptors.
EXAMPLE 8
Carrageenan-Induced Mechanical Hyperalgesia (Paw Pressure) Assay for Determining Pain Relief
This Example illustrates a representative method for assessing the degree of pain relief provided by a test compound.
Adult male Sprague Dawley rats (200-30Og; obtained from Harlan Sprague
Dawley, Inc., Indianapolis, IN) are housed under a 12 h light/dark cycle with access to food and water ad libitum. For the assay, all animals are habituated once, baselined twice and tested once, with each procedure being conducted on a separate day. Prior to each day's procedure, animals are allowed to acclimate for at least 1 hour in the testing room before the start of the procedure. For habituation, each animal is gently restrained with each hindpaw consecutively extended in front of the animal as is necessary for testing. This procedure is performed by alternating hindpaws and repeated three times for each hindpaw. Animals are then subjected to the first baseline, second baseline and testing on consecutive days. For each baseline, the animal is restrained as in the habituation session and the paw tested using the paw pressure testing apparatus (Digital Randall Selitto, IITC Inc., Woodland Hills, CA). Animals are baselined and tested in groups of ten, each animal being tested once on the left and right hindpaws, followed by the next consecutive animal. This procedure is repeated three times for a total of three measurements on each hindpaw. If any individual read is drastically different (varies by more than about 100 g) from the other two on a given hindpaw, the hindpaw is retested a 4th time, and the average of the three most consistent scores is used. On test day, all animals are injected with 0.1 mL intraplantar 0.5% -1.5% carrageenan (dissolved in saline) 3 hours prior to testing. Test compounds or vehicle may be administered by various routes at various timepoints prior to testing, but for any particular assay, the routes and timepoints are the same for animals in each treatment group administered test compound (a different dosage of test compound may be administered to each such group) and those in the treatment group administered vehicle control. If a compound is orally administered, the animals are food-deprived the evening before testing. As with the baseline, each hindpaw is tested three times and the results recorded for analysis.
Hypersensitivity of nociception values are calculated for each treatment group as the mean of the left foot gram force scores on test day (left foot only or LFO score). Statistical significance between treatment groups is determined by running an
ANOVA on LFO scores followed with a least significant difference (LSD) post hoc test. A p<0.05 is considered to be a statistically significant difference.
Compounds are said to relieve pain in this model if they result in a statistically significant reduction in hypersensitivity of nociception values compared to vehicle controls, determined as described above, when administered (0.01-50 mg/kg, orally, parenterally or topically) immediately prior to testing as a single bolus, or for several days: once or twice or three times daily prior to testing.
I l l Those skilled in the art will appreciate that numerous changes and modifications can be made to the preferred embodiments of the invention and that such changes and modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the invention. It is, therefore, intended that the appended claims cover all such equivalent variations as fall within the true spirit and scope of the invention.

Claims

1. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to formula Ia or Ib:
Figure imgf000114_0001
Ia Ib wherein:
U is CR1A or N;
W is -CC=O)NR4- -NR4Q=O)- or -NR4-NR4-CC=O)-; each R4 is independently hydrogen, Ci-C6alkyl, (C3-Cgcycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl or taken together with a substituent of X to form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl;
X is absent or Ci-C6alkylene that is optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents selected from RB, RC, RD, and RE;
RB, RC, RD, and RE are each independently hydroxy, -COOH, Ct-Csalkyl, (C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, Ci-Cόaminoalkyl, C2-Cgalkyl ether, mono- or Ui-(C1- C6alkyl)aminoCo-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl and phenylCo-C2alkyl; or any two of RB, RC, RD, and RE taken together with the carbon atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; or any one of RB, RC, RD, and RE taken together with R4 and the atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl;
Y is Ci-Qalkyl, C3-C16cycloalkyl, 4- to 16-membered heterocycloalkyl, 6- to 16-membered aryl or 5- to 16-membered heteroaryl, each of which is optionally substituted with 1 to 6 substituents independently chosen from hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, nitro, oxo, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, COOH, Cj-C6alkyl, C2- C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, CrCόhaloalkyl,
Figure imgf000114_0002
CrCeaminoalkyl, C1- C6alkoxy, Q-Cόhaloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, CrC6alkanoyl, Ci-Cόalkylsulfonyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl, mono- or (Ii-(C1 -C6alkyl)amino, Ci-Cealkanoylamino, mono- or (Ii-(C1 -C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di^CrCδalkytyaminosulfonyl and (C i -C6alkyl)sulfonylamino;
Z1, Z2, Z3, and Z4 are independently CR1 or N; R1A is hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, COOH, CrC6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, d-C6haloalkyl, Ci-C6hydroxyalkyl, Ci-Cόaminoalkyl, Q-Qalkoxy, Q-Cόhaloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, C!-C6alkanoyl, Q-Cealkylsulfonyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, Ci-Cealkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (Ci-Cόalkytysulfonylamino; each R1 is independently hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, COOH, Ci-C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, CrCδhaloalkyl, Q-Cohydroxyalkyl, CrCeaminoalkyl, CrQalkoxy, Q- C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-C6alkanoyl, Ci-Cδalkylsulfonyl, (C3- C7cycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, CrCόalkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (Ci-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino; and RA is a group of the formula -L-A-M, wherein:
L is absent or Ci-C6alkylene that is optionally modified by (i) the replacement of a carbon-carbon single bond with a double or triple carbon-carbon bond, or (ii) substitution with oxo, -COOH, -SO3H, -SO2NH2, -PO3H2, tetrazole or oxadiazolone;
A is absent or CO, O, NR6, S, SO, SO2, CONR6, NR6CO, (C4- C7cycloalkyl)C0-C2alkyl, 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl or 5- or 6-membered heteroaryl; wherein R6 is hydrogen or Ci-C6alkyl; and
M is: (i) hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, carboxyalkyl, or -COOH; or
(ii) CrCόhaloalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, (4- to 10-membered carbocycle)C0-C4alkyl,
(4- to 10-membered heterocycle)Co-C4alkyl, Ci-C6alkanoyloxy, CrCβalkanoylamino,
Ci-C6alkylsulfonyl, CrCόalkylsulfonylamino, Ci-Cδalkylsulfonyloxy, mono- or di- Ci-C6alkylamino, mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(Ci-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; each of which is optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, alkoxycarbonyl, alkanoyloxy, CrC6alkyl, Ci-C6hydroxyalkyl, Q-Qhaloalkyl, CrC6alkoxy, Ci-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-Cgalkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C!-C6alkyl)amino, CrCόalkylsulfonyl, CrCόalkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(Cj- C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle; provided that for a compound of Formula Ia;
(a) when U is N, W is -CO=O)NH-, and L and A are absent, then M is other than thienyl or unsubstituted or halogen-substituted 4- to 10-membered carbocycle;
(b) when U is N, W is - NHC(=O)-, and A is absent, then M is other than thienyl or unsubstituted or halogen-substituted 4- to 10-membered carbocycle;
(c) when U is CH , then W-X-Y is other than:
Figure imgf000116_0001
wherein Rx is H or C(=O)-O-alkyl;
(d) when one Of Z1, Z2, Z3, and Z4 is N, and the others Of Z1, Z2, Z3, and Z4 are each CH, RA and Y are each independently alkyl, aryl aralkyl or heteroaryl, W is — C(=O)N(H)-, and U is CR1A, then RjA is other than OH;
(e) when Z1, Z2, Z3,and Z4 are each CH, RA is unsubstituted phenyl, W is — CO=O)N(H)-, X is unsubstituted alkylene or alkylene substituted with one hydroxyl, Y is dialkylamino, unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl substituted with one alkyl, and U is CR1A, then RJA is other than halogen; and
(f) when Z1, Z2, Z3,and Z4 are each CR1, at least two of R1 are H and the remaining R1 are each independently H, halogen, nitro, hydroxy, or alkoxy, RA is cycloalkyl or substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, W is -C(=O)N(H)-, X is unsubstituted alkylene, Y is alkyl or cycloalkyl each optionally substituted with one COOH, dialkylamino, unsubstituted heteroaryl, unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl substituted with nitrile or amino, and U is CRJA, then RJA is other than alkyl.
2. A compound or salt of hydrate thereof according to claim 1, wherein U is CH or N.
3. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 2, having formula Ia.
4. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 3, wherein
R1A is hydrogen, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, COOH, C1- C6alkyl, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, Ci-Cehaloalkyl, CrC6hydroxyalkyl, Ci- C6aminoalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, d-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, CrCβalkanoyl, C1- C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3-C7cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, C1- C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(Ci- C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (C!-C6alkyl)sulfonylamino.
5. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 4, wherein R1A is hydrogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, COOH, C2-C6alkenyl, C2-C6alkynyl, Cj-Cόhaloalkyl, CrC6hydroxyalkyl, Ci-C6aminoalkyl, C1-QaIkOXy, Ci-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-C6alkanoyl, Ci-C6alkylsulfonyl, (C3- C7cycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, Ci-Cδalkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl or (C i -C6alkyl)sulfonylamino .
6. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-5, wherein RB, RC, RD, and RE are each independently -COOH, Q-Cgalkyl,
(C3-C8cycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl, Ci-Cδaminoalkyl, C2-Csalkyl ether, mono- or di-(Ci- C6alkyl)aminoCo-C4alkyl, (4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl)C0-C4alkyl and phenylCo-C2alkyl; or any two of RB, RC, RD, and RE taken together with the carbon atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; or any one of RB, RC, RD, and RE taken together with R4 and the atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl
7. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein RB, RC, RD, and RE are each independently C]-C4alkyl, (C3- C8cycloalkyl)Co-C2alkyl, or phenylCo-C2alkyl; or any two of RB, RC, RD, and RE taken together with the carbon atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl or a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl; or any one of RB, RC, RD, and RE taken together with R4 and the atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 4- to 7-membered heterocycloalkyl.
8. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein U is CH.
9. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims
1 to 7, wherein U is N.
10. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein X is substituted.
11. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1 to 10, wherein Y is Q-Cgalkyl, C3-C16cycloalkyl, 6- to 16-membered aryl or (5- to
16-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted.
12. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 11, wherein Y is Ci-Cgalkyl, 6- to 16-membered aryl or (5- to 16-membered heteroaryl, each optionally substituted.
13. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims
1 to 12, wherein Y is optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents.
14. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1 to 13, wherein Z1, Z2, Z3, and Z4 are CH.
15. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1 to 14, wherein W is -NR4CC=O)- or -NR4-NR4-CC=O)-.
16. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1 to 15, wherein M is:
(i) hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or -COOH; or (ii) Ci-Cβhaloalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, (4- to 10-membered aryl)C0-C4alkyl, (4- to
10-membered heterocycle)C0-C4alkyl, Q-Cβalkanoyloxy, CrCόalkanoylamino, C1- C6alkylsulfonyl, Q-Cealkylsulfonylamino, Ci-Cβalkylsulfonyloxy, mono- or di-Q- C6alkylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(Q- C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; each of which is optionally substituted with from 1 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, C1-C6OIlCyI, CrQhydroxyalkyl, C1- C6haloalkyl, Q-Qalkoxy, C]-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, Ci-Cβalkanoylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)amino, Q-Cealkylsulfonyl, CrCόalkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle.
17. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 16, wherein M is:
(i) hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or -COOH; or (ii) Ci-C6haloalkyl, Ci-C6alkoxy, (4- to 10-membered aryl)C0-C4alkyl, (4- to
10-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl, Ci-Cόalkanoyloxy, Q-Cδalkanoylamino, CrCόalkylsulfonyl, Ci-Coalkylsulfonylamino, Q-Cealkylsulfonyloxy, mono- or di- Cϊ-Cealkylamino, mono- or di-(C!-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(Cj- C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; each of which is optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, Ci-Cβalkyl, Q-Cβhydroxyalkyl, C1- C6haloalkyl, Q-Qalkoxy, Ci-C6haloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether, Cj-Cόalkanoylamino, mono- or di-(Cj-C6alkyl)amino, d-C6alkylsulfonyl, d-Cδalkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle.
18. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 17, wherein M is:
(i) hydroxy, halogen, cyano, amino, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl or -COOH; or (ii) d-Cόhaloalkyl, Q-Cόalkoxy, (4- to 10-membered heterocycloalkyl)Co-C4alkyl, C1 -C6alkanoyloxy, C \ -C6alkanoylamino,
Ci-Qalkylsulfonyl, Ci-Coalkylsulfonylamino, CrCδalkylsulfonyloxy, mono- or di- CrCόalkylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, or mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminocarbonyl; each of which is optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents independently chosen from oxo, amino, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, aminocarbonyl, aminosulfonyl, -COOH, Ci-C6alkyl, C1 -C6IIy droxyalkyl, CrQhaloalkyl, C1-QaIkOXy, CrCδhaloalkoxy, C2-C6alkyl ether,
C!-C6alkanoylamino, mono- or di-(CrC6alkyl)amino, Ci-Cόalkylsulfonyl, CrQalkylsulfonylamino, mono- or di-(C1-C6alkyl)aminosulfonyl, mono- or di-(Ci- C6alkylamino)carbonyl, and 4- to 7-membered heterocycle.
19. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1 to 18, wherein RA is other than halophenyl.
20. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 19, wherein RA is other than haloaryl.
21. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims
1 to 18, wherein RA is other than cycloalkyl.
22. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1 to 18, wherein RA is other than thienyl.
23. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1 to 22, wherein when RA is optionally substituted heteroaryl, said heteroaryl has at least one oxygen or nitrogen ring atom.
24. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 23, wherein RA is other than optionally substituted heteroaryl.
25. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 23, wherein when RA is optionally substituted heteroaryl, said heteroaryl contains at least one nitrogen ring atom.
26. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 25, wherein when RA is optionally substituted heteroaryl, said heteroaryl contains at least two nitrogen ring atoms.
27. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1 to 26, wherein RA is other than carbocyclic.
28. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1 to 27, wherein U is CH and W-X-Y is other than unsubstituted -C(=O)N(H)aralkyl.
29. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1 to 28, wherein U is CH and W-X-Y is other than unsubstituted - C(=O)N(H)heteroaralkyl.
30. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1 to 29, wherein U is CH and W-X-Y is other than unsubstituted - C(=O)N(H)heterocyclic.
31. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1 to 30, wherein U is CH and W-X-Y is other than unsubstituted -
C(=O)N(H)alkoxyalkyl.
32. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1 to 31, wherein U is CH and W-X-Y is other than unsubstituted -C(=O)N(H)RV, wherein Rv is aniinoalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, or dialkylaminoalkyl, alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl.
33. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1 to 32, wherein U is CH and W-X-Y is optionally substituted -C(=O)N(H)RV, wherein Rv is arylCi-C4alkyl or heteroarylCi-C4alkyl.
34. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-14, wherein W is-C(=O)N(H)-.
35. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 34, wherein M is optionally substituted heteroaryl.
36. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 35, wherein said heteroaryl contains at least one nitrogen ring atom.
37. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 36, wherein said heteroaryl contains at least two nitrogen ring atoms.
38. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 37, wherein M is optionally substituted pyrimidinyl.
39. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 38, wherein
M optionally substituted pyrimidin-2-yl.
40. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 34-39, wherein X is CrC2alkylene, optionally substituted.
41. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 40, wherein X is Ci-C2alkylene, substituted with C1-C4alkyl.
42. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 40, wherein X is substituted with at least 2 substituents selected from RB, RC, RD, and RE, wherein: any two of RB, RC, RD, and RE taken together with the carbon atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 3- to 7-membered cycloalkyl.
43. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 42, wherein
X is substituted with at least 2 substituents selected from RB, RC, RD, and RE, wherein: any two of RB, Rc, RD, and RE taken together with the carbon atom or atoms through which they are connected form a 5- to 6-membered cycloalkyl.
44. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 34-39, wherein Y is an optionally substituted carbocycle or an optionally substituted heterocycle.
45. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 44, wherein Y is adamantyl, phenyl, pyridyl, or morpholinyl, each optionally substituted.
46. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to claim 1, wherein the compound is:
N-(adamantan- 1 -ylmethyl)- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxamide ;
N- {4-methyl-2- [4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]pentyl} - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H- indole-3-carboxamide;
N-[2-(4-chlorophenyl)pentyl]-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-indole-3-carboxamide;
N- [( 1 -pyridin-3 -ylcyclohexyl)methyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 - carboxamide; l-pyrimidin-2-yl-N-({l-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]cyclohexyl}methyl)-lH- indole-3-carboxamide;
N- { [ 1 -(4-chlorophenyl)cyclohexyl]methyl} - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 - carboxamide;
N- { [ 1 -(4-methoxyphenyl)cyclohexyl]methyl} - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 - carboxamide; N- [( 1 -morpholin-4-ylcyclohexyl)methyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3- carboxamide;
2- { 3 - [(adamantan- 1 -ylmethyl)carbamoyl] - 1 H-indol- 1 -yl } benzoic acid;
N- [4-methyl-2-(4-methylphenyl)pentyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 - carboxamide; N-(4-methyl-2-pyridin-3 -ylpentyl)- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 - carboxamide;
N-(4-methyl-2-phenylpentyl)- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3-carboxamide;
N- { [ 1 -(6-methylpyridin-3 -yl)cyclohexyl]methyl } - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole- 3-carboxamide; N- { [ 1 -(4-fluorophenyl)cyclohexyl]methyl} - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 - carboxamide;
2- { 3 - [(adamantan- 1 -ylmethyl)carbamoyl] - 1 H-indol- 1 -yl } pentanoic acid;
1 -(5 -fluoropyrimidin-2-y I)-N- [( 1 -pyridin-3 -ylcyclohexyl)methyl] - 1 H-indole- 3-carboxamide; 1 -(3-ethylpyrazin-2-yl)-N- [( 1 -pyridin-3 -ylcyclohexyl)methyl] - 1 H-indole-3 - carboxamide;
4-chloro-N- [( 1 -pyridin-3 -ylcyclohexyl)methyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 - carboxamide; N- { [ 1 -(4-methoxyphenyl)cyclopentyl]methyl} - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3- carboxamide;
N- { [ 1 -(4-methylphenyl)cyclohexyl]methyl } - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 - carboxamide;
N- { [ 1 -(4-chloro-3 -fluorophenyl)cyclohexyl]methyl } - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H- indole-3 -carboxamide;
N- [2-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-piperidin- 1 -ylethyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 - carboxamide; methyl 2-(3-{[(l -pyridin-3 -ylcyclohexyl)methyl] carbamoyl } - 1 H-indol- 1 - yl)nicotinate; N- [( 1 -pyridin-3 -ylcyclohexyl)methyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl-4-(trifluoromethyl)-
1 H-indole-3 -carboxamide;
4-bromo-N-[(l-pyridin-3-ylcyclohexyl)methyl]-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-indole-3- carboxamide;
4-cyano-N- [( 1 -pyridin-3 -ylcyclohexyl)methyl]- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 - carboxamide;
N- { [ 1 -(4-methoxyphenyl)cyclohexyl]methyl} - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl-4- (trifluoromethyl)- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxamide;
N- { [1 -(4-fluorophenyl)cyclohexyl] methyl} - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl-4- (trifluoromethyl)- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxamide; N-{[l-(6-methylpyridin-3-yl)cyclohexyl]methyl}-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-4-
(trifluoromethyl)- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxamide;
7-chloro-N- [( 1 -pyridin-3 -ylcyclohexyl)methyl]- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3- carboxamide; 4-fluoro-N-(4-methyl-2-pyridin-3 -ylpentyl)- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 - carboxamide;
N- [2-(4-chlorophenyl)-4-methylpentyl] -4-fluoro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole- 3 -carboxamide; 4-fluoro-N- [4-methyl-2 -(4-methylphenyl)pentyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-
3 -carboxamide;
4-fluoro-N-{4-methyl-2-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]pentyl}-l-pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxamide;
N-{[l-(4-chloro-3-fluorophenyl)cyclohexyl]methyl}-4-fluoro-l-pyrimidin-2- yl-1 H-indole-3 -carboxamide;
4-fluoro-N-[( 1 -pyridin-3 -ylcyclohexyl)methyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 - carboxamide;
4-fluoro-N- { [ 1 -(4-methylphenyl)cyclohexyl]methyl } - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H- indole-3-carboxamide; 4-fluoro-N- { [ 1 -(4-methoxyphenyl)cyclohexyl]methyl} - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H- indole-3 -carboxamide;
4-fluoro-N- { [ 1 -(4-fluorophenyl)cyclohexyl]methyl } - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H- indole-3 -carboxamide;
N- { [ 1 -(4-chlorophenyl)cyclohexyl]methyl } -4-fluoro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H- indole-3 -carboxamide;
1 -Pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 ,4-dicarboxylic acid 4-amide 3 - [(I -pyridin-3 -yl- cyclohexylmethyl)-amide] ;
1 - [( 1 -methyl- 1 H-imidazol-2-yl)methyl] -N- [( 1 -pyridin-3 - ylcyclohexyl)methyl] - 1 H-indole-2-carboxamide; 4-methyl-N- [(I -pyridin-3 -ylcyclohexyl)methyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-
3-carboxamide;
4-methyl-N-(4-methyl-2-pyridin-3 -ylpentyl)- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 - carboxamide; N- { [ 1 -(4-methoxyphenyl)cyclohexyl]methyl } -4-methyl- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H- indole-3 -carboxamide;
N- [2-(4-chlorophenyl)-4-methylpentyl] -4-methyl- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole- 3 -carboxamide; N- { [ 1 -(4-chlorophenyl)cyclohexyl]methyl} -4-methyl- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H- indole-3 -carboxamide;
4-chloro-N-[2-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-morpholin-4-ylethyl]-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH- indole-3 -carboxamide;
N- [2-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-morpholin-4-ylethyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl-4- (trifluoromethyl)- 1 H- indole-3 -carboxamide;
N- [2-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-piperidin- 1 -ylethyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl-4- (trifluoromethyl)- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxamide;
N-(adamantan- 1 -ylmethyl)-4-chloro- 1 -[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl] - 1 H-indole-3 - carboxamide; N-(adamantan- 1 -ylmethyl)-4-chloro- 1 -[3 -(dimethylamino)propyl]- 1 H-indole-
3-carboxamide;
4-chloro-N-[2-(4-chlorophenyl)-4-methylpentyl]-l-[3- (dimethylamino)propyl]-lH-indole-3-carboxamide;
4-chloro- 1 - [3 -(dimethylamino)propyl] -N-(4-methyl-2-pyridin-3 -ylpentyl)- 1 H- indole-3 -carboxamide;
4-chloro- 1 - [2-(dimethylamino)ethyl] -N-(4-methyl-2-pyridin-3 -ylpentyl)- 1 H- indole-3 -carboxamide;
4-chloro-N- [2-(4-chlorophenyl)-4-methylpentyl] - 1 - [2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]- lH-indole-3-carboxamide; N-[2-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-piperidin- 1 -ylethyl] -4-fluoro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H- indole-3-carboxamide;
N- [2-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-piperidin- 1 -ylethyl] -4-methyl- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H- indole-3-carboxamide; N-[2-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-morpholin-4-ylethyl]-4-fluoro-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH- indole-3 -carboxamide;
4-fluoro-N- [2-(6-methoxypyridin-3 -yl)-2-piperidin- 1 -ylethyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2- yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxamide ; N- [2-(6-methoxypyridin-3 -yl)-2-piperidin- 1 -ylethyl] -4-methyl- 1 -pyrimidin-2- yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxamide;
N-(adamantan- 1 -ylmethyl)-4-methyl- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 - carboxamide;
4-chloro-N- [2-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-piperazin- 1 -ylethyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H- indole-3-carboxamide;
4-chloro-N-(2-morpholin-4-yl-2-phenylethyl)-l -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 - carboxamide;
4-chloro-N- [2-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-piperidin- 1 -ylethyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H- indole-3 -carboxamide; 4-chloro-N-{2-piperidin-l-yl-2-[4-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]ethyl}-l- pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxamide;
4-chloro-N-[2-(4-chloro-3-fluorophenyl)-2-piperidin-l-ylethyl]-l -pyrimidin- 2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxamide;
4-chloro-N- [2-(6-methoxypyridin-3 -yl)-2-piperidin- 1 -ylethyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2- yl-lH-indole-3-carboxamide;
4-chloro-N- [2-(3 ,4-difluorophenyl)-2-piperidin- 1 -ylethyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxamide ;
3 -chloro- 1 - [( 1 -methyl- 1 H-imidazol-2-yl)methyl]-N-(4-methyl-2-pyridin-3 - ylpentyl)- 1 H-indole-2-carboxamide; 4-chloro-N-[(l-pyridin-3-ylcyclohexyl)methyl]-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH- pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-carboxamide;
4-chloro-N-(4-methyl-2-pyridin-3 -ylpentyl)- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-pyrrolo [2,3 - b]pyridine-3 -carboxamide;
2-adamantan- 1 -yl-N-(4-chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indol-3 -yl)acetamide; 4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid (adamantan- 1 - ylmethyl)-amide;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid (2-adamantan- 1 -yl- ethyl)-amide; 4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid ((R)-6,6- dimethylbicyclo[3.1. l]hept-2-ylmethyl)-amide;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid (4-methyl-2-p-tolyl- pentyl)-amide;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid [2-(4-chloro-phenyl)- 4-methyl-pentyl]-amide;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid [ 1 -(4-chloro-phenyl)- cyclohexylmethyl] -amide ;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid [ 1 -(4-trifluoromethyl- phenyl) -cyclohexylmethyl] -amide ; 4-Chloro-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH-indole-3-carboxylic acid [4-(4-chloro-phenyl)- tetrahydro-pyran-4-ylmethyl]-amide;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid [ 1 -(4-methoxy- phenyl)-cyclohexylmethyl]-amide;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid [4-methyl-2-(4- trifluorornethyl-phenyl)-pentyl] -amide;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid [2-(4-chloro-phenyl)- pentyl] -amide;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid (4-methyl-2-pyridin- 3-yl-pentyl)-amide; 4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid [l-(4-chloro-phenyl)- cyclobutylmethyl] -amide ;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid (2 -adamantan- l-yl-2- hydroxy-ethyl)-amide; 4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid (3 -methyl-butyl)- amide;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid (2-phenyl-pentyl)- amide; 4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid (4-methyl-2-phenyl- pentyl)-amide;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid (3 -cyclopentyl-2- phenyl-propyl)-amide ;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid (2-cyclohexyl-2- phenyl-ethyl)-amide;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid (2,3-diphenyl- propyl)-amide;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid (3 -phenyl-butyl)- amide; 4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid (4-phenyl-butyl)- amide;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid [2-(4-bromo-phenyl)- ethyl] -amide;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid (3,3,5-trimethyl- cyclohexyl)-amide;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid adamantan-2-ylamide;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid cycloheptylmethyl- amide;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid [2-(2-bromo-phenyl)- ethyl] -amide;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid ((I S,2R)-2-hydroxy- cyclohexylmethyl)-amide;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid ( 1 -hydroxy- cyclohexylmethyl)-amide; 4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid ( 1 -hydroxy- cyclopentylmethyl)-amide;
4-Chloro- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxylic acid (4-hydroxy- tetrahydro-tbiopyran-4-ylmethyl)-amide; N-[2-(4-fluorophenyl)-2-piperidin- 1 -ylethyl] -4-methyl- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H- indole-3 -carboxamide ;
N-[2-(3,4-difluorophenyl)-2-piperidin-l-yletliyl]-4-methyl-l-pyrimidin-2-yl- lH-indole-3-carboxamide;
4-methyl-N-(2-morpholin-4-yl-2-phenylethyl)- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 - carboxamide;
N- [2-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-morpholin-4-ylethyl] -4-methyl- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H- indole-3 -carboxamide;
3 -chloro-N-[2-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-piperidin- 1 -ylethyl] - 1 - [( 1 -methyl- 1 H- imidazol-2-yl)methyl] - 1 H-indole-2-carboxamide; N- { [4-(4-chlorophenyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl]methyl} -4-methyl- 1 - pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxamide;
3 -chloro-N- { [4-(4-chlorophenyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl]methyl} - 1 - [( 1 - methyl- 1 H-imidazol-2-yl)methyl] - 1 H-indole-2-carboxamide;
N- [2-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-piperidin- 1 -ylethyl] -4-methyl- 1 -pyrazin-2-yl- 1 H- indole-3 -carboxamide;
N- [2-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-morpholin-4-ylethyl] -4-methyl- 1 -pyrazin-2-yl- 1 H- indole-3 -carboxamide;
N- [2-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-piperidin- 1 -ylethyl] - 1 -(3 -cyanopyridin-2-yl)-4- methyl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxamide; 1 -(3 -cyanopyridin-2-yl)-4-methyl-N-(2-morpholin-4-yl-2-phenylethyl)- 1 H- indole-3 -carboxamide;
N-[2-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-moφholin-4-ylethyl]-l-(3-cyanopyridin-2-yl)-4- methyl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxamide; 4-methyl-N-(4-methyl-2-morpholin-4-ylpentyl)- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole- 3-carboxamide;
4-chloro-N- {2-piperidin- 1 -yl-2- [6-(trifluoromethyl)pyridin-3 -yl] ethyl} - 1 - pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 -carboxamide; 4-chloro-N- [2-(4-fluorophenyl)-2-piperidin- 1 -ylethyl]- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H- indole-3 -carboxamide;
4-chloro-N- [( 1 -hydroxycycloheptyl)methyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-indole-3 - carboxamide;
4-chloro-N- [2-(3 ,4-difluorophenyl)-2-piperidin- 1 -ylethyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- lH-indole-3-carboxamide;
4-chloro-N- [2-(2,4-difluorophenyl)-2-piperidin- 1 -ylethyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- lH-indole-3-carboxamide;
4-chloro-N-[2-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-moφholin-4-ylethyl]-l-pyrimidin-2-yl-lH- pyrrolo [2,3 -b]pyridine-3 -carboxamide; 4-chloro-N- [2-(4-chlorophenyl)-2-piperidin- 1 -ylethyl]- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H- pyrrolo [2,3 -b]pyridine-3 -carboxamide ;
4-chloro-N- { [4-(4-chlorophenyl)tetrahydro-2H-pyran-4-yl]methyl} - 1 - pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-pyrrolo [2,3 -b]pyridine-3 -carboxamide;
4-chloro-N- [( 1 -hydroxycycloheptyl)methyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-pyrrolo [2,3 - b]pyridine-3 -carboxamide;
4-chloro-N- [( 1 -hydroxycyclohexyl)methyl]- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-pyrrolo [2,3 - b]pyridine-3 -carboxamide;
4-chloro-N-[2-(3 ,4-difluorophenyl)-2-piperidin- 1 -ylethyl] - 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- 1 H-pyrrolo [2,3 -b]pyridine-3 -carboxamide; 4-chloro-N-(2-morpholin-4-yl-2-phenyl ethyl)- 1 -pyrimidin-2-yl- IH- pyrrolo[2,3-b]pyridine-3-carboxamide; or
4-chloro-N- { [ 1 -(4-methylpiperazin- 1 -yl)cyclohexyl]methyl} - 1 -pyrimidin-2- yl-lH-indole-3-carboxamide.
47. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-46, wherein the compound exhibits no detectable agonist activity an in vitro assay of P2X7 receptor agonism.
48. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-47, wherein the compound is capable of exhibiting an IC50 value of 20 micromolar or less in an assay for P2X7 receptor antagonism.
49. A pharmaceutical composition, comprising at least one compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-48 in combination with a physiologically acceptable carrier or excipient.
50. A pharmaceutical composition according to claim 49, wherein the composition is formulated as an injectible fluid, an aerosol, a cream, an oral liquid, a tablet, a gel, a pill, a capsule, a syrup, or a transdermal patch.
51. A method for modulating the activity of a P2X7 receptor in vitro, the method comprising contacting the P2X7 receptor with at least one compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-48, under conditions and in an amount sufficient to detectably alter P2X7 receptor activity.
52. A method for modulating the activity of a P2X7 receptor in a patient, comprising contacting cells expressing P2X7 receptor with at least one compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-48, in an amount sufficient to detectably alter P2X7 receptor activity in vitro, and thereby altering the activity of the P2X7 receptor in the patient.
53. A method according to claim 52, wherein the patient is a human.
54. A method for treating a condition responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-48, and thereby alleviating the condition in the patient.
55. A method according to claim 54, wherein the condition is pain.
56. A method according to claim 55, wherein the pain is neuropathic pain.
57. A method according to claim 55, wherein the pain is arthritis- associated pain, a neuropathic pain syndrome, visceral pain, dental pain, headache, stump pain, meralgia paresthetica, burning-mouth syndrome, pain associated with nerve and root damage, causalgia, neuritis, neuronitis, neuralgia, surgery-related pain, musculoskeletal pain, central nervous system pain, spinal pain, Charcot's pains, ear pain, muscle pain, eye pain, orofacial pain, carpel tunnel syndrome, acute and chronic back pain, gout, scar pain, hemorrhoidal pain, dyspeptic pains, angina, nerve root pain, complex regional pain syndrome, cancer-associated pain, pain associated with venom exposure, trauma-associated pain, pain associated with autoimmune diseases or immunodeficiency disorders, or pain that results from hot flashes, burns, sunburn, or exposure to heat, cold or external chemical stimuli.
58. A method according to claim 54, wherein the condition is inflammation, a neurological or neurodegenerative disorder, a cardiovascular disorder, an ocular disorder or an immune system disorder.
59. A method according to claim 54, wherein the condition is osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, arthrosclerosis, glaucoma, irritable bowel syndrome, inflammatory bowel disease, cirrhosis, lupus, scleroderma, Alzheimer's disease, traumatic brain injury, asthma, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, or interstitial fibrosis.
60. A method for inhibiting death of retinal ganglion cells in a patient, comprising administering to the patient a therapeutically effective amount of at least one compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-48, and thereby inhibiting death of retinal ganglion cells in the patient.
61. A method according to any one of claims 54-60, wherein the patient is a human.
62. A compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-48, wherein the compound is radiolabeled.
63. A method for determining the presence or absence of P2X7 receptor in a sample, comprising the steps of:
(a) contacting a sample with a compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-48, under conditions that permit modulation by the compound of P2X7 receptor activity; and
(b) detecting a signal indicative of a level of the compound or salt or hydrate thereof modulating P2X7 receptor activity, and therefrom determining the presence or absence of P2X7 receptor in the sample.
64. A packaged pharmaceutical preparation, comprising: (a) a pharmaceutical composition according to claim 49 or 50 in a container; and
(b) instructions for using the composition to treat pain.
65. A packaged pharmaceutical preparation, comprising:
(a) a pharmaceutical composition according to claim 49 or 50 in a container; and
(b) instructions for using the composition to treat inflammation, a neurological or neurodegenerative disorder, a cardiovascular disorder, an ocular disorder or an immune system disorder.
66. The use of a compound or salt or hydrate thereof according to any one of claims 1-48 for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a condition responsive to P2X7 receptor modulation.
67. A use according to claim 66, wherein the condition is pain, inflammation, a neurological or neurodegenerative disorder, a cardiovascular disorder, an ocular disorder or an immune system disorder.
PCT/US2008/072760 2007-08-10 2008-08-11 Heteroaryl amide analogues WO2009023623A1 (en)

Priority Applications (10)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
BRPI0812594-5A BRPI0812594A2 (en) 2007-08-10 2008-08-11 Compound or salt or hydrate thereof, pharmaceutical composition, methods for modulating p2x7 receptor activity, for treating a condition responsive to p2x7 receptor modulation in a patient, for inhibiting retinal ganglionic cell death in a patient for determination the presence or absence of a p2x7 receptor in a sample, packaged pharmaceutical preparation, and use of a compound or salt or hydrate thereof.
AU2008286946A AU2008286946B2 (en) 2007-08-10 2008-08-11 Heteroaryl amide analogues
EA200971085A EA020332B1 (en) 2007-08-10 2008-08-11 Heteroaryl amide analogues
US12/672,413 US20120190680A1 (en) 2007-09-20 2008-08-11 Heteroaryl Amide Analogues
CN200880021498A CN101778850A (en) 2007-08-10 2008-08-11 Heteroaryl amide analogs
JP2010520343A JP2010535816A (en) 2007-08-10 2008-08-11 Heteroaryl amide analogues
CA002691512A CA2691512A1 (en) 2007-08-10 2008-08-11 Heteroaryl amide analogues
EP08797591A EP2185560A4 (en) 2007-08-10 2008-08-11 Heteroaryl amide analogues
NZ582056A NZ582056A (en) 2007-08-10 2008-08-11 Bicyclic heteroaryl compounds for treating conditions related to p2x7 receptor activation
IL202550A IL202550A0 (en) 2007-08-10 2009-12-06 Heteroaryl amide analogues

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US95525007P 2007-08-10 2007-08-10
US60/955,250 2007-08-10

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2009023623A1 true WO2009023623A1 (en) 2009-02-19

Family

ID=40351102

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2008/072760 WO2009023623A1 (en) 2007-08-10 2008-08-11 Heteroaryl amide analogues

Country Status (14)

Country Link
EP (1) EP2185560A4 (en)
JP (2) JP2010535816A (en)
KR (1) KR20100066422A (en)
CN (1) CN101778850A (en)
AU (1) AU2008286946B2 (en)
BR (1) BRPI0812594A2 (en)
CA (1) CA2691512A1 (en)
CO (1) CO6251319A2 (en)
EA (1) EA020332B1 (en)
IL (1) IL202550A0 (en)
NZ (1) NZ582056A (en)
SG (1) SG183699A1 (en)
UA (1) UA99729C2 (en)
WO (1) WO2009023623A1 (en)

Cited By (30)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2010118921A1 (en) * 2009-04-14 2010-10-21 Affectis Pharmaceuticals Ag Novel p2x7r antagonists and their use
WO2012110190A1 (en) * 2011-02-17 2012-08-23 Affectis Pharmaceuticals Ag Novel p2x7r antagonists and their use
WO2012163792A1 (en) * 2011-05-27 2012-12-06 Affectis Pharmaceuticals Ag Novel p2x7r antagonists and their use
WO2012163456A1 (en) * 2011-05-27 2012-12-06 Affectis Pharmaceuticals Ag Novel p2x7r antagonists and their use
WO2013108227A1 (en) * 2012-01-20 2013-07-25 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd Heterocyclic amide derivatives as p2x7 receptor antagonists
WO2014014951A1 (en) 2012-07-17 2014-01-23 Envoy Therapeutics, Inc. 5-ht3 receptor antagonists
WO2014091415A1 (en) 2012-12-12 2014-06-19 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd Indole carboxamide derivatives as p2x7 receptor antagonists
WO2014097140A1 (en) 2012-12-18 2014-06-26 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd Indole carboxamide derivatives as p2x7 receptor antagonists
WO2014115078A1 (en) 2013-01-22 2014-07-31 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd Heterocyclic amide derivatives as p2x7 receptor antagonists
WO2014152604A1 (en) * 2013-03-14 2014-09-25 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2x7 modulators
US9120788B2 (en) 2013-02-19 2015-09-01 Pfizer Inc. Azabenzimidazole compounds
US9221832B2 (en) 2011-07-22 2015-12-29 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Heterocyclic amide derivatives as P2X7 receptor antagonists
WO2016100281A1 (en) * 2014-12-15 2016-06-23 Merck Patent Gmbh Indole and azaindoles derivatives and their use in neurodegenerative diseases
US9388197B2 (en) 2013-01-22 2016-07-12 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Heterocyclic amide derivatives as P2X7 receptor antagonists
US9540388B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-01-10 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2X7 modulators
US9556166B2 (en) 2011-05-12 2017-01-31 Proteostasis Therapeutics, Inc. Proteostasis regulators
US9598421B2 (en) 2014-08-06 2017-03-21 Pfizer Inc. Imidazopyridazine compounds
US9604982B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-03-28 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2X7 modulators
US9850262B2 (en) 2013-11-12 2017-12-26 Proteostasis Therapeutics, Inc. Proteasome activity enhancing compounds
WO2018042377A1 (en) 2016-09-03 2018-03-08 Torrent Pharmaceuticals Limited Novel indazole compounds
US9926312B2 (en) 2013-10-01 2018-03-27 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. 4-azaindole derivatives
US10047092B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2018-08-14 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Substituted [1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyrazines as P2X7 modulators
US10131669B2 (en) 2014-07-24 2018-11-20 Pfizer Inc. Pyrazolopyrimidine compounds
US10150766B2 (en) 2014-09-12 2018-12-11 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2X7 modulators
US10329306B2 (en) 2014-09-29 2019-06-25 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Crystalline form of 1-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-N-((IR,5S,7S)-9-methyl-3-oxa-9-azabicyclo[3.3.1]nonan-7-yl)-1H-indole-3-carboxamide
US11084789B2 (en) 2016-01-14 2021-08-10 Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Inc. Mast-cell modulators and uses thereof
US11597728B2 (en) 2018-09-28 2023-03-07 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Monoacylglycerol lipase modulators
US11820766B2 (en) 2018-09-28 2023-11-21 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Monoacylglycerol lipase modulators
US11839663B2 (en) 2019-09-30 2023-12-12 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Radiolabelled MGL pet ligands
US11891387B2 (en) 2020-03-26 2024-02-06 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Monoacylglycerol lipase modulators

Families Citing this family (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
ES2644025T3 (en) * 2013-07-17 2017-11-27 Global Alliance For Tb Drug Development Azaindole compounds, synthesis thereof, and methods of use thereof
JP6462493B2 (en) 2015-05-29 2019-01-30 株式会社デンソー Approach determination device, approach determination method
WO2022062991A1 (en) * 2020-09-22 2022-03-31 苏州恩华生物医药科技有限公司 Indole derivatives and use thereof
WO2023198199A1 (en) * 2022-04-15 2023-10-19 先声再明医药有限公司 Myt1 kinase inhibitor

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6337344B1 (en) * 1997-12-24 2002-01-08 Aventis Pharma Deutschland Gmbh Indole derivatives as inhibitors or factor Xa
US6881844B2 (en) * 2002-10-03 2005-04-19 Hoffman-La Roche Inc. Indole-3-carboxamides as glucokinase activators
US7166637B2 (en) * 2002-11-15 2007-01-23 Elbion Ag Hydroxyindoles, their use as inhibitors of phosphodiesterase 4, and processes for preparing them

Family Cites Families (22)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE2557342A1 (en) * 1975-12-19 1977-06-30 Hoechst Ag BASIC SUBSTITUTED INDOLDER DERIVATIVES AND THE PROCESS FOR THEIR PRODUCTION
DE2931323A1 (en) * 1979-08-02 1981-02-26 Kali Chemie Pharma Gmbh NEW N-AMINOALKYLINDOL DERIVATIVES AND THEIR SALTS
DE3131527A1 (en) * 1981-08-08 1983-02-24 Kali-Chemie Pharma Gmbh, 3000 Hannover 1-PHENYL-2-AMINOCARBONYLINDOL COMPOUNDS AND METHODS AND INTERMEDIATE PRODUCTS FOR THEIR PRODUCTION AND MEDICINAL PRODUCTS CONTAINING THESE COMPOUNDS
US5023265A (en) * 1990-06-01 1991-06-11 Schering Corporation Substituted 1-H-pyrrolopyridine-3-carboxamides
TW229140B (en) * 1992-06-05 1994-09-01 Shell Internat Res Schappej B V
US5424329A (en) * 1993-08-18 1995-06-13 Warner-Lambert Company Indole-2-carboxamides as inhibitors of cell adhesion
EE04565B1 (en) * 1999-04-09 2005-12-15 Astrazeneca Ab Adamantane derivatives, their preparation and use
MXPA02003436A (en) * 1999-10-07 2002-08-20 Amgen Inc Triazine kinase inhibitors.
US6653304B2 (en) * 2000-02-11 2003-11-25 Bristol-Myers Squibb Co. Cannabinoid receptor modulators, their processes of preparation, and use of cannabinoid receptor modulators for treating respiratory and non-respiratory diseases
WO2002012189A1 (en) * 2000-08-09 2002-02-14 Mitsubishi Pharma Corporation Fused bicyclic amide compounds and medicinal use thereof
PL368129A1 (en) * 2001-08-09 2005-03-21 Ono Pharmaceutical Co, Ltd. Carboxylic acid derivative compounds and drugs comprising these compounds as the active ingredient
EP1314733A1 (en) * 2001-11-22 2003-05-28 Aventis Pharma Deutschland GmbH Indole-2-carboxamides as factor Xa inhibitors
AU2003303217A1 (en) * 2002-12-20 2004-07-14 Bayer Healthcare Ag Use of substituted 2,5-diamidoindoles for the treatment of urological diseases
FR2857966A1 (en) * 2003-07-24 2005-01-28 Aventis Pharma Sa New piperazine and tetrahydropyridine derivatives are tubulin polymerization inhibitors used for treating cancer and disaggregating cell masses derived from vascular tissue
SE0302192D0 (en) * 2003-08-08 2003-08-08 Astrazeneca Ab Novel compounds
US7544803B2 (en) * 2004-01-23 2009-06-09 Amgen Inc. Vanilloid receptor ligands and their use in treatments
FR2874015B1 (en) * 2004-08-05 2006-09-15 Sanofi Synthelabo N- (1H-INDOLYL) -1H-INDOLE-2-CARBOXAMIDE DERIVATIVES, THEIR PREPARATION AND THEIR THERAPEUTIC USE
FR2880625B1 (en) * 2005-01-07 2007-03-09 Sanofi Aventis Sa N- (HETEROARYL) -1H-INDOLE-2-CARBOXAMIDE DERIVATIVES, THEIR PREPARATION AND THEIR THERAPEUTIC USE
TW200700387A (en) * 2005-03-21 2007-01-01 Akzo Nobel Nv 1-benzylindole-2-carboxamide derivatives
FR2888847B1 (en) * 2005-07-22 2007-08-31 Sanofi Aventis Sa N- (HETERIARYL) -1-HETEORARYLALKYL-1H-INDOLE-2-CARBOXAMIDE DERIVATIVES, THEIR PREPARATION AND THERAPEUTIC APPLICATION
US20070213359A1 (en) * 2005-12-30 2007-09-13 Acadia Pharmaceuticals Inc. Bicyclic-nitrogen compounds as modulators of ghrelin receptor and uses thereof
US20070265270A1 (en) * 2006-02-21 2007-11-15 Hitchcock Stephen A Cinnoline derivatives as phosphodiesterase 10 inhibitors

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6337344B1 (en) * 1997-12-24 2002-01-08 Aventis Pharma Deutschland Gmbh Indole derivatives as inhibitors or factor Xa
US6881844B2 (en) * 2002-10-03 2005-04-19 Hoffman-La Roche Inc. Indole-3-carboxamides as glucokinase activators
US7166637B2 (en) * 2002-11-15 2007-01-23 Elbion Ag Hydroxyindoles, their use as inhibitors of phosphodiesterase 4, and processes for preparing them

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
SCHAUS J.M. ET AL.: "Synthesis and Structure-Activity Relationships of Potent and Orally Active 5-HT4 Receptor Antagonists: Indazole and Benzimidazolone Derivatives", JOURNAL OF MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY, vol. 41, 1998, pages 1943 - 1955, XP002089295 *
See also references of EP2185560A4 *

Cited By (92)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2010118921A1 (en) * 2009-04-14 2010-10-21 Affectis Pharmaceuticals Ag Novel p2x7r antagonists and their use
EP2243772A1 (en) * 2009-04-14 2010-10-27 Affectis Pharmaceuticals AG Novel P2X7R antagonists and their use
CN102395562A (en) * 2009-04-14 2012-03-28 阿费克蒂斯制药股份公司 Novel p2x7r antagonists and their use
JP2012523440A (en) * 2009-04-14 2012-10-04 アフェクティス ファーマシューティカルズ アーゲー Novel P2X7R antagonists and uses thereof
WO2012110190A1 (en) * 2011-02-17 2012-08-23 Affectis Pharmaceuticals Ag Novel p2x7r antagonists and their use
US10532996B2 (en) 2011-05-12 2020-01-14 Proteostasis Therapeutics, Inc. Proteostasis regulators
EP2707101B1 (en) * 2011-05-12 2019-02-13 Proteostasis Therapeutics, Inc. Proteostasis regulators
US9556166B2 (en) 2011-05-12 2017-01-31 Proteostasis Therapeutics, Inc. Proteostasis regulators
WO2012163456A1 (en) * 2011-05-27 2012-12-06 Affectis Pharmaceuticals Ag Novel p2x7r antagonists and their use
WO2012163792A1 (en) * 2011-05-27 2012-12-06 Affectis Pharmaceuticals Ag Novel p2x7r antagonists and their use
US9221832B2 (en) 2011-07-22 2015-12-29 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Heterocyclic amide derivatives as P2X7 receptor antagonists
WO2013108227A1 (en) * 2012-01-20 2013-07-25 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd Heterocyclic amide derivatives as p2x7 receptor antagonists
AU2013210682B2 (en) * 2012-01-20 2017-05-25 Idorsia Pharmaceuticals Ltd Heterocyclic amide derivatives as P2X7 receptor antagonists
TWI576347B (en) * 2012-01-20 2017-04-01 艾克泰聯製藥有限公司 Heterocyclic amide derivatives as p2x7 receptor antagonists
CN104066737A (en) * 2012-01-20 2014-09-24 埃科特莱茵药品有限公司 Heterocyclic amide derivatives as P2X7 receptor antagonists
EA024204B1 (en) * 2012-01-20 2016-08-31 Актелион Фармасьютиклз Лтд. Heterocyclic amide derivatives as p2xreceptor antagonists
US9409917B2 (en) 2012-01-20 2016-08-09 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Heterocyclic amide derivatives as P2X7 receptor antagonists
EA025986B1 (en) * 2012-07-17 2017-02-28 Такеда Фармасьютикал Компани Лимитед 5-ht3 receptor antagonists
KR20150036692A (en) * 2012-07-17 2015-04-07 다케다 야쿠힌 고교 가부시키가이샤 5-ht3 receptor antagonists
KR102148969B1 (en) 2012-07-17 2020-08-27 다케다 야쿠힌 고교 가부시키가이샤 5-ht3 receptor antagonists
WO2014014951A1 (en) 2012-07-17 2014-01-23 Envoy Therapeutics, Inc. 5-ht3 receptor antagonists
US10407443B2 (en) 2012-07-17 2019-09-10 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited 5-HT3 receptor antagonists
US9303045B2 (en) 2012-07-17 2016-04-05 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited 5-HT3 receptor antagonists
US9346829B2 (en) 2012-07-17 2016-05-24 Takeda Phamaceutical Company Limited 5-HT3 receptor antagonists
WO2014014962A1 (en) * 2012-07-17 2014-01-23 Envoy Therapeutics, Inc. 5ht3 receptor antagonists
US9670229B2 (en) 2012-07-17 2017-06-06 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited 5-HT3 receptor antagonists
CN104768943A (en) * 2012-07-17 2015-07-08 武田药品工业株式会社 5-ht3 receptor antagonists
US9012447B2 (en) 2012-07-17 2015-04-21 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited 5-HT3 receptor antagonists
EP3312169A1 (en) 2012-07-17 2018-04-25 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited 5-ht3 receptor antagonists
US10125145B2 (en) 2012-07-17 2018-11-13 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited 5-HT3 receptor antagonists
CN104768943B (en) * 2012-07-17 2016-11-16 武田药品工业株式会社 5-HT3 receptor antagonist
WO2014091415A1 (en) 2012-12-12 2014-06-19 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd Indole carboxamide derivatives as p2x7 receptor antagonists
US9718774B2 (en) 2012-12-12 2017-08-01 Idorsia Pharmaceuticals Ltd Indole carboxamide derivatives as P2X7 receptor antagonist
WO2014097140A1 (en) 2012-12-18 2014-06-26 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd Indole carboxamide derivatives as p2x7 receptor antagonists
US9556117B2 (en) 2012-12-18 2017-01-31 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Indole carboxamide derivatives as P2X7 receptor antagonists
US9388198B2 (en) 2013-01-22 2016-07-12 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Heterocyclic amide derivatives as P2X7 receptor antagonists
US9388197B2 (en) 2013-01-22 2016-07-12 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd. Heterocyclic amide derivatives as P2X7 receptor antagonists
WO2014115078A1 (en) 2013-01-22 2014-07-31 Actelion Pharmaceuticals Ltd Heterocyclic amide derivatives as p2x7 receptor antagonists
US9815832B2 (en) 2013-02-19 2017-11-14 Pfizer Inc. Azabenzimidazole compounds
US9120788B2 (en) 2013-02-19 2015-09-01 Pfizer Inc. Azabenzimidazole compounds
TWI644671B (en) * 2013-03-14 2018-12-21 比利時商健生藥品公司 P2x7 modulators
AU2017206153B2 (en) * 2013-03-14 2019-02-14 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2X7 modulators
US10112937B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2018-10-30 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2X7 modulators and methods of use
EP3239151A1 (en) * 2013-03-14 2017-11-01 Janssen Pharmaceutica NV P2x7 modulators
US10703749B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2020-07-07 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2X7 modulators
WO2014152604A1 (en) * 2013-03-14 2014-09-25 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2x7 modulators
EA028816B1 (en) * 2013-03-14 2018-01-31 Янссен Фармацевтика Нв P2x7 modulators
KR102500076B1 (en) 2013-03-14 2023-02-14 얀센 파마슈티카 엔.브이. P2x7 modulators
KR20220044376A (en) * 2013-03-14 2022-04-07 얀센 파마슈티카 엔.브이. P2x7 modulators
US9540388B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-01-10 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2X7 modulators
US10047092B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2018-08-14 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Substituted [1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyrazines as P2X7 modulators
US10053463B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2018-08-21 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Substituted [1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyrazines as P2X7 modulators
US10053462B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2018-08-21 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2X7 modulators
KR20150127723A (en) * 2013-03-14 2015-11-17 얀센 파마슈티카 엔.브이. P2x7 modulators
AU2014239291B2 (en) * 2013-03-14 2017-06-15 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2X7 modulators
KR102516711B1 (en) 2013-03-14 2023-03-30 얀센 파마슈티카 엔.브이. P2x7 modulators
US9464084B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2016-10-11 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2X7 modulators
US11225478B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2022-01-18 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2X7 modulators
KR20210132743A (en) * 2013-03-14 2021-11-04 얀센 파마슈티카 엔.브이. P2x7 modulators
US10150765B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2018-12-11 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2X7 modulators
US9604982B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2017-03-28 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2X7 modulators
AU2021236451B2 (en) * 2013-03-14 2024-02-01 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2X7 modulators
US11820770B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2023-11-21 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2X7 modulators
EP3495365A1 (en) * 2013-03-14 2019-06-12 Janssen Pharmaceutica NV P2x7 modulators
KR102319857B1 (en) 2013-03-14 2021-11-01 얀센 파마슈티카 엔.브이. P2x7 modulators
US10323032B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2019-06-18 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2X7 Modulators
AU2019203186B2 (en) * 2013-03-14 2021-06-24 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2X7 modulators
US9066946B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2015-06-30 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2X7 modulators
US10072005B2 (en) 2013-10-01 2018-09-11 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. 4-azaindole derivatives
US9926312B2 (en) 2013-10-01 2018-03-27 Eisai R&D Management Co., Ltd. 4-azaindole derivatives
US9850262B2 (en) 2013-11-12 2017-12-26 Proteostasis Therapeutics, Inc. Proteasome activity enhancing compounds
US11958873B2 (en) 2013-11-12 2024-04-16 Kineta, Inc. Proteasome activity enhancing compounds
US11242361B2 (en) 2013-11-12 2022-02-08 Proteostasis Therapeutics, Inc. Proteasome activity enhancing compounds
US10131669B2 (en) 2014-07-24 2018-11-20 Pfizer Inc. Pyrazolopyrimidine compounds
US10669279B2 (en) 2014-08-06 2020-06-02 Pfizer Inc. Imidazopyridazine compounds
US9598421B2 (en) 2014-08-06 2017-03-21 Pfizer Inc. Imidazopyridazine compounds
US10077269B2 (en) 2014-08-06 2018-09-18 Pfizer Inc. Imidazopyridazine compounds
US10150766B2 (en) 2014-09-12 2018-12-11 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv P2X7 modulators
US10329306B2 (en) 2014-09-29 2019-06-25 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Crystalline form of 1-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-N-((IR,5S,7S)-9-methyl-3-oxa-9-azabicyclo[3.3.1]nonan-7-yl)-1H-indole-3-carboxamide
CN107207476B (en) * 2014-12-15 2021-03-19 默克专利有限公司 Indole and azaindole derivatives and their use in neurodegenerative diseases
US10323000B2 (en) 2014-12-15 2019-06-18 Merck Patent Gmbh Indole derivatives and their use in neurodegenerative diseases
US10676433B2 (en) 2014-12-15 2020-06-09 Merck Patent Gmbh Indole derivatives and their use in neurodegenerative diseases
AU2015362700B2 (en) * 2014-12-15 2020-04-16 Merck Patent Gmbh Indole and azaindoles derivatives and their use in neurodegenerative diseases
WO2016100281A1 (en) * 2014-12-15 2016-06-23 Merck Patent Gmbh Indole and azaindoles derivatives and their use in neurodegenerative diseases
CN107207476A (en) * 2014-12-15 2017-09-26 默克专利有限公司 Indoles and 7-azaindole derivatives and its for the purposes in neurodegenerative disorders
US11084789B2 (en) 2016-01-14 2021-08-10 Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Inc. Mast-cell modulators and uses thereof
WO2018042377A1 (en) 2016-09-03 2018-03-08 Torrent Pharmaceuticals Limited Novel indazole compounds
US11820766B2 (en) 2018-09-28 2023-11-21 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Monoacylglycerol lipase modulators
US11597728B2 (en) 2018-09-28 2023-03-07 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Monoacylglycerol lipase modulators
US11993601B2 (en) 2018-09-28 2024-05-28 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Monoacylglycerol lipase modulators
US11839663B2 (en) 2019-09-30 2023-12-12 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Radiolabelled MGL pet ligands
US11891387B2 (en) 2020-03-26 2024-02-06 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Monoacylglycerol lipase modulators

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
SG183699A1 (en) 2012-09-27
CA2691512A1 (en) 2009-02-19
KR20100066422A (en) 2010-06-17
UA99729C2 (en) 2012-09-25
EA020332B1 (en) 2014-10-30
AU2008286946A1 (en) 2009-02-19
CN101778850A (en) 2010-07-14
JP2010535816A (en) 2010-11-25
NZ582056A (en) 2012-08-31
CO6251319A2 (en) 2011-02-21
JP2015110566A (en) 2015-06-18
BRPI0812594A2 (en) 2015-06-23
EP2185560A4 (en) 2011-10-05
EP2185560A1 (en) 2010-05-19
AU2008286946B2 (en) 2013-11-21
EA200971085A1 (en) 2010-06-30
IL202550A0 (en) 2010-06-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU2008286946B2 (en) Heteroaryl amide analogues
US20120190680A1 (en) Heteroaryl Amide Analogues
DK2178865T3 (en) 5-membered heterocyclic amides and related compounds
US8580812B2 (en) Heteroaryl amide analogues as P2X7 antagonists
US20100216763A1 (en) Heteroaryl Amide Derivatives
WO2009108551A2 (en) Heteroaryl amide analogues
WO2007140383A2 (en) Spirocyclic sulfonamides and related compounds
WO2008024692A1 (en) N-oxide aryl sulfones and sulfoxides
Ihle et al. Heteroaryl amide analogues as P2X7 antagonists

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200880021498.2

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 08797591

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 12009502354

Country of ref document: PH

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2008797591

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2691512

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 582056

Country of ref document: NZ

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2008286946

Country of ref document: AU

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20097026704

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2010520343

Country of ref document: JP

Ref document number: 2009121867

Country of ref document: EG

Ref document number: 200971085

Country of ref document: EA

Ref document number: MX/A/2009/014158

Country of ref document: MX

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 09146587

Country of ref document: CO

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 249/CHENP/2010

Country of ref document: IN

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2008286946

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20080811

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: PI 20095342

Country of ref document: MY

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: A200913336

Country of ref document: UA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 12672413

Country of ref document: US

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: PI0812594

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20091221